Yamaha YSP 3000 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: YSP 3000

Categoría: Receptor

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

YSP-3000

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WK75380

YSP-3000

Digital Sound Projector

OWNER’S MANUAL

00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 2, 2007 11:19 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

i En

■ Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to

alert you to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert you to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that

produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-

type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than

the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the

provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician

for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning

storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is

required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such

as power supply cable or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled

or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has

been dropped.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

ii En

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void

your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another

product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied

with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”

digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a

reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a

residential environment will not result in harmful interference

with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the

users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined

by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type

of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed

by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying

blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries

Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT.

iii En

To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit

– away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,

moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or

transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold

to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high

humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation

inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this

unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage

to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this

unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.

in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside

this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are

complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly

causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet,

grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage

the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit

with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not

be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit

with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable

disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed.

The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall

outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common

operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in

standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the

wall outlet.

18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the

outlet, then leave the unit alone.

19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm.

Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling.

20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug

can be reached easily.

21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as

sunshine, fire or the like.

Caution: Read this before operating this unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO

NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING

THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE

CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A

PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as

it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is

turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby

mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small

quantity of power.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this

Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot

and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug

supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an

appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions

described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead

must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous

if engaged in a live socket outlet.

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make

sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three

pin plug.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace

only with the same or equivalent type.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other

than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation

exposure.

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

SETUP

English

1 En

Overview ................................................................. 2

Features .................................................................. 3

Using this manual .................................................. 5

Supplied accessories .............................................. 6

Controls and functions .......................................... 7

Front panel ................................................................ 7

Front panel display ................................................... 8

Rear panel ................................................................. 9

Remote control

(Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) ..... 10

Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) ......... 13

Installation ............................................................ 16

Before installing this unit ........................................ 16

Installing this unit ................................................... 16

Connections .......................................................... 19

Before connecting components ............................... 20

Connections using HDMI cables ............................ 21

Connecting a TV ..................................................... 22

Connecting a DVD player/recorder ........................ 23

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

............................................................................. 24

Connecting a digital airwave tuner ......................... 25

Connecting a portable audio player ........................ 26

Connecting other external components .................. 27

Connecting a subwoofer ......................................... 28

Connecting the FM antenna .................................... 29

About the IR IN terminal

(U.S.A. and Canada models only) ...................... 29

Connecting the AC power supply cable ................. 29

Getting started ..................................................... 30

Installing batteries in the remote control ................ 30

Operation range of the remote control .................... 30

Turning on this unit or setting it to

the standby mode ................................................ 31

Using SET MENU ................................................ 32

Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................ 32

The flow chart of SET MENU ................................ 33

Changing OSD language ..................................... 34

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) .............................. 35

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ........................... 35

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone ................... 36

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ....................... 37

Using the system memory ................................... 42

Convenient usage of the system memory ............... 42

Saving settings ........................................................ 42

Loading settings ...................................................... 43

Playback ............................................................... 45

Selecting the input source ....................................... 45

Playing back sources ............................................... 46

Adjusting the volume .............................................. 47

FM tuning ............................................................. 48

FM controls and functions ...................................... 48

Automatic tuning .................................................... 49

Manual tuning ......................................................... 49

Automatic preset tuning .......................................... 50

Manual preset tuning .............................................. 51

Selecting a preset station ........................................ 52

Displaying the Radio Data System information

(Europe model only) ........................................... 52

Enjoying surround sound ....................................54

5 Beam .................................................................... 54

Stereo plus 3 Beam ................................................. 55

3 Beam .................................................................... 55

My Surround ........................................................... 55

Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...... 57

Enjoying TV in surround sound ............................. 58

Adjusting surround mode parameters ..................... 59

Enjoying stereo sound ..........................................60

2-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60

5-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) ..............61

Using auto-adjust function ...................................... 61

Using manual-adjust function ................................. 62

Using sound field programs .................................63

CINEMA DSP programs ........................................ 64

Using the music enhancer ....................................66

Using the volume mode

(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode)

Using the sleep timer ............................................68

Displaying the input source information ............70

Using the HDMI control feature .........................71

MANUAL SETUP ................................................72

Using MANUAL SETUP ....................................... 73

BEAM MENU ........................................................ 74

SOUND MENU ...................................................... 78

INPUT MENU ........................................................ 80

DISPLAY MENU ................................................... 83

Adjusting the audio balance ................................84

Using the test tone .................................................. 84

Using the audio output being played back .............. 85

Selecting the input mode ......................................87

Adjusting the system parameters .......................88

Using the system parameters .................................. 88

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT ......................... 89

Setting the MAX VOLUME ................................... 90

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME .......................... 90

Setting the DEMO MODE ..................................... 91

Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY ........................... 92

Disabling the front panel keys ................................ 93

Setting the FACTORY PRESET ............................ 94

Remote control features .......................................96

Setting remote control codes .................................. 96

Controlling other components ................................ 97

Using the TV macro ............................................. 100

Troubleshooting ..................................................102

Glossary ...............................................................105

Index ....................................................................107

Specifications ......................................................108

List of remote control codes...........................................i

Contents

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

SETUP

BASIC OPERATION

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Overview

2 En

It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of

wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of

surround sound experience as your local movie theater.

Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and

troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound.

This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is

not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for

from its built-in 2 woofers and 21 full-range small speakers.

You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly

directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions.

The YSP-3000 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L),

surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room

before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector

creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room.

Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector.

Overview

Listening position

Imaginary

surround left

speaker

Imaginary

surround right

speaker

Imaginary

front left

speaker

Imaginary

front right

speaker

Imaginary

center

speaker

Features

3 En

INTRODUCTION

English

Digital Sound Projector™

The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim

unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to

generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates

the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally

associated with conventional surround sound systems.

This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy

the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam,

and My Surround), 2-channel and 5-channel stereo

playback, and My Beam.

My Surround

In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit

is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you

to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area.

My Surround is a function integrated and optimized with

DiMAGIC’s Euphony technology and Yamaha’s Beam

reproduction system.

My Beam

This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in

a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle

manually or automatically using the supplied remote

control to the maximum of 45°, rightward and leftward.

Cinema DSP

This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed

by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience

movies at home with all the original dramatic sound

impact.

HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition

video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as

multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP

◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external

components

◆ Functional link with an HDMI control-compatible TV

Versatile Remote Control

The supplied remote control comes with preset remote

control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable

TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit.

In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro

capability that enables a series of operations with the press

of a single button.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic

optimization technology with the aid of the supplied

IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome

listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate

sound beam adjustments that best match your listening

environment.

Compatibility with the Newest Technologies

This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby

Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS

Neo:6, Music Enhancer, and Neural Surround.

◆ Dolby Digital

This is the standard audio signal format used on various

digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This

surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up

to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more

realistic effect.

◆ DTS

This is the standard audio signal format used on various

digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This

surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up

to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more

realistic effect.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic

This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts

any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth

playback, resulting in a surround sound experience.

◆ Dolby Pro Logic II

This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs

2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly

enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides

an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a

much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic.

◆ DTS Neo:6

This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources

for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range

channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema

mode are available to play back music and movie sources

respectively.

◆ Music Enhancer to restore the original depth and width of

compression artifacts such as the MP3 format.

◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A and Canada models only)

Sophisticated FM tuner

◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)

XM™ Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the XM Mini-

Tuner Dock, and Antenna sold separately by XM Satellite

Radio)

◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of

XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in

a full surround sound experience

◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability

iPod™ Controlling Capability

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod

(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini

◆ Playback information displaying capability

◆ Battery charging capability

Features

4 En

The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of

YAMAHA Corporation.

The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered

trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

“DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.

“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia

Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents

applied for.

The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector

™

” are trademarks

of 1 Ltd.

TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks

of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under

license from SRS Labs, Inc.

™

is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd.

Using this manual

5 En

INTRODUCTION

English

• This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the

supplied owner’s manual for each component.

• Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified.

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority.

1 Install this unit in your listening room.

See “Installation” on page 16.

2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components.

See “Connections” on page 19.

3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit.

See “Getting started” on page 30.

4 Run AUTO SETUP.

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35.

5 Play back a source.

See “Playback” on page 45.

6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings.

See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54.

7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 and “Remote control features” on page 96.

Using this manual

Notes

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

Supplied accessories

6 En

Check that you have received all of the following parts.

Supplied accessories

Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.

Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC

wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual.

YSP-3000

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Printed in Malaysia

WK75520 [En]

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

AUX 1

TV/STB

SUBWOOFER

AUX 1

DVD

AUX 2

VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

DVD player

Decide where to install this unit.

Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired

surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.

YSP-3000

Connecting external components to this unit

Installing this unit

This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the

surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit using a rack, etc.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before

installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you

install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit.

For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the

adjacent walls.

40˚ to 50˚

An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture

To the AC wall

outlet

132

Pull out the cap

before connecting

the optical cable,

and then check the

direction to insert the

cable.

Do not plug the power

supply cable into an AC

wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

Items used for connections and operations

in this guide

Audio pin cable (x1)

OSD* video pin cable (x1)

Optical cable (x1)

Digital audio pin cable (x1)

IntelliBeam microphone (x1)

Cardboard microphone stand (x1)

Demonstration DVD (x1)

*OSD: On-Screen Display

Connection

example 1

1. Pull out the cap

2. Check the direction

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to

this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the

analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video

connection between your DVD player and TV.

VIDEO

INPUT

HDMI

INPUT

HDMI

OUTPUT

HDMI

OUT

DVD

AUX 1

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

AUX 1

TV/STB

SUBWOOFER

AUX 1

DVD

AUX 2

VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

To the AC wall

outlet

Connect cables in the following order.

Install this unit in the

rack.

Place this unit in front of

the rack.

This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can

enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have

a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections

using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual.

Connection

example 2

DVD player

YSP-3000

Do not plug the power

supply cable into an AC

wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Supplied Sold separately

Connect cables in the following order.

1 OSD video pin cable

(Displaysthe YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)

2 HDMI cable

(Displaysthe DVD digital video on the TV)

3 HDMI cable

(InputsDVD digital audio/video signals to this unit)

(Sold separately)

Place this unit upside

down and connect this unit to

your TV and DVD player.

y Hint

•To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.

•You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions

supplied with the metal wall bracket.

Note

Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack.

Video connection

Supplied

1Audio pin cable

(OutputsTV analog audio sounds from this unit)

2 OSD video pin cable

(Displaysthe YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)

3 Optical cable

(Outputs

TV digital audio sounds from this unit)

4 Digital audio pin cable

(OutputsDVD digital audio sounds from this unit)

The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They

are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.

Installation is completed.

The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of

cloth on the floor in step 2.

y Hint

Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD

player is turned on.

y Hint

•If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV

(except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote

control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power,

select the audio output component, and adjust the volume

level of this unit.

•Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD

player is turned on.

The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help youfind them easily. They

are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.

Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/

Digital airwave tuner

Audio connection

HDMI connection

Subwoofer

Optical cable

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

Remote control (×1)

Batteries (×2)

(AA, R6, UM-3)

OSD* video pin cable (×1)

IntelliBeam microphone

(×1)

Fasteners (×4)

Audio pin cable (×1)

Digital audio pin cable (×1)

Optical cable (×1)

Cable clamp (×1)

Cardboard microphone

stand (×1)

(Orange)

(White/Red)

(Yellow)

Indoor FM antenna (×1)

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Demonstration DVD

(×1)

YSP-3000

Digital Sound Projector

Reference Guide for iPod/XM Radio

This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and

operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the

supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this

unit, refer to the owner’s manual.

The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only.

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation.

Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2

Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2

Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2

XM Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)........................................................ 5

Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock................................................................................................. 5

Activating XM Satellite Radio.................................................................................................................. 6

Basic XM Satellite Radio operations........................................................................................................ 6

Presetting the XM Satellite Radio channels.............................................................................................. 9

Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...................................................................................... 10

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 11

Overview

Contents

iPod

REFERENCE GUIDE

(iPod/XM Radio) (×1)

QUICK REFERENCE

GUIDE

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia

models only)

* The number of provided languages

varies depending on the sales area.

*OSD: On-Screen Display

Controls and functions

7 En

INTRODUCTION

English

1 AUX 3 input jack

Connect your portable audio player (see page 26).

2 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO

SETUP (see page 36).

3 Remote control sensor

Receives infrared signals from the remote control.

4 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

5 INPUT

Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see

page 45).

Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see

page 91).

6 VOLUME +/–

Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see

page 47).

7 STANDBY/ON

Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 31).

• When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound

followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound

reproducing.

• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of

power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote

control or to search for HDMI signals.

Controls and functions

Front panel

3 4

STANDBY/ON

VOLUME

INPUT

INTELLIBEAM MIC

AUX 3

Notes

Controls and functions

8 En

1 HDMI indicator

Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is

input at the HDMI IN jack(s).

2 TUNER indicators

FM: Light up when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast.

XM: MEMORY flashes during the XM preset operation

(U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when a sound field program is selected (see

page 64).

4 PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code

Modulation) digital audio signals.

5 Decoder indicators

Light up when the corresponding decoder operates

(see page 56).

The neural decoder is available for the U.S.A. and Canada models

only.

6 ENHANCER indicator

Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (see

page 66).

7 Volume level indicator

Displays the current volume level.

8 DOCK indicator

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Lights up when your iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano,

or iPod mini is connected to this unit via the DOCK

terminal on this unit.

9 SRS TruBass indicator

Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 79).

0 EQUAL indicator

Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected

(see page 67).

A NIGHT indicator

Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is

selected (see page 67).

B SLEEP indicator

Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 68).

C Radio Data System indicators

(Europe model only)

Show the current Radio Data System status.

D XM indicator

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Lights up when XM is selected as the input source.

E Multi-information display

Shows information with alphanumeric characters when

you adjust the parameters of this unit.

F Input channel indicators

Show information when you adjust the parameters of this

unit. The channel component of the current digital input

signal is displayed (see page 56).

You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front

panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 83).

Front panel display

AB C D

Note

Controls and functions

9 En

INTRODUCTION

English

The illustration below shows the rear panel of the U.S.A. and Canada models.

1 ANTENNA jack

Connect the FM antenna (see page 29).

2 DOCK terminal

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-

10, sold separately) (see page 2 in the Reference Guide).

3 AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks

Connect an external component via an analog connection

(see page 23).

4 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks

Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner

via an analog connection (see pages 22 and 24).

5 VIDEO OUT jack

Connect to the video input jack of your TV to display the

OSD of this unit (see page 22).

6 SUBWOOFER OUT jack

Connect your subwoofer (see page 28).

7 AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect an external component via a coaxial digital

connection (see page 27).

8 AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect an external component via an optical digital

connection (see page 27).

9 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner

via an optical digital connection (see pages 22 and 24).

0 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack

Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection

(see page 23).

A XM antenna jack

(U.S.A and Canada models only)

Connect your XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately)

(see page 5 in the Reference Guide).

B IR IN terminal

(U.S.A and Canada models only)

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use

only (see page 29).

C AUX 1 HDMI IN jack

Connect your digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital

air wave tuner, or game console via an HDMI connection

(see page 21).

D DVD HDMI IN jack

Connect your DVD player via an HDMI connection (see

page 21).

E HDMI OUT jack

Connect to the HDMI IN jack on your HDMI component

such as a TV or a projector connected to this unit (see

page 21).

F AC power supply cable

Connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 29).

Rear panel

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

AUX 1

DVD

OUT

HDMI

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Controls and functions

10 En

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an

asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP

and TV/AV operation modes (S).

You can also control other components using the remote control

once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See

“Controlling other components” on page 97 for details.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 STANDBY/ON

Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31).

3 Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

4 Input selector buttons

Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3, STB, TV, or FM).

5 VOL MODE

Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67).

6 AUTO SETUP

Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35).

7 CINEMA DSP program buttons

Select the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63).

8 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66).

9 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Select and adjust SET MENU items.

0 DISPLAY

Displays information on the selected input signal.

A VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see

page 47).

B MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level (see page 47).

C TV INPUT

Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see

page 97).

D CH LEVEL

Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85).

E TEST

Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each

channel (see page 84).

Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models)

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

A-E

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

+10

MY SUR.

Controls and functions

11 En

INTRODUCTION

English

F DVD player/VCR control buttons

Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99).

G My Beam microphone

Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My

Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61).

H TV POWER

Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 97).

I AV POWER

Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to

the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99).

J INPUT1

Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97).

K MACRO

Use to set the TV macro (see page 100).

L a/5

Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit

is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52).

M A-E

Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is

receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52).

N SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 68).

O INPUTMODE

Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and

ANALOG) (see page 87).

P Beam mode buttons

Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and

61).

Q SUR. DECODE

Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57).

R MENU

Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see

pages 37 and 73).

S Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

T RETURN

Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET

MENU screen.

U TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97).

V CH +/–

Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99).

W TV MUTE, CODE SET

Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97).

Sets up remote control codes (see page 96).

The functions L and M are available only when the FM stations

are preset.

Note

Controls and functions

12 En

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control FM, Radio Data System, or iPod when the

TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector

(7). Note that the Radio Data System controls are

available for Europe model only, and the iPod controls are

available for Australia model only.

1 PRESET/TUNE

FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the

frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52).

2 Numeric buttons

FM: Enter numbers.

3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station

number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52).

Use A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to

E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the input

above.

These functions are also available when this unit is receiving the

Radio Data System (see page 52) or playing back your iPod (see

page 3 in the Reference Guide).

4 DISPLAY

Radio Data System and iPod: Displays information when

this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52)

or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference

Guide).

5 MEMORY

FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51).

This function is also available when this unit is receiving the

Radio Data System (see page 52).

6 SEARCH

FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see

page 49).

7 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

A-E

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

A-E

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

TVAV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

Controls and functions

13 En

INTRODUCTION

English

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an

asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP

and TV/AV operation modes (S).

You can also control other components using the remote control

once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See

“Controlling other components” on page 97 for details.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 STANDBY/ON

Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31).

3 Transmission indicator

Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.

4 Input selector buttons

Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2,

AUX3/DOCK, STB, TV, or FM/XM).

5 VOL MODE

Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67).

6 AUTO SETUP

Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35).

7 Sound field program buttons

Select the sound field programs (see page 63).

8 ENHANCER

Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66).

9 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Select and adjust SET MENU items.

0 DISPLAY

Displays information on the selected input signal.

A VOLUME +/–

Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see

page 47).

B MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level (see page 47).

C TV INPUT

Toggles between the input source on your TV (see

page 97).

D CH LEVEL

Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85).

E TEST

Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each

channel (see page 84).

Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models)

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

MY SUR.

3BEAM

SUR. DECODE

Controls and functions

14 En

F DVD player/VCR control buttons

Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99).

G My Beam microphone

Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My

Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61).

H TV POWER

Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby

mode (see page 97).

I AV POWER

Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to

the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99).

J INPUT1

Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97).

K MACRO

Use to set the TV macro (see page 100).

L a/5

Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit

is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see

page 52).

M CAT

Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is

receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 52).

N SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer (see page 68).

O INPUTMODE

Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and

ANALOG) (see page 87).

P Beam mode buttons

Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and

61).

Q SUR. DECODE

Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57).

R MENU

Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see

pages 37 and 73).

S Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

T RETURN

Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET

MENU screen.

U TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97).

V CH +/–

Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99).

W TV MUTE, CODE SET

Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97).

Sets up remote control codes (see page 96).

The functions L and M are available only when the FM/XM

stations are preset.

Note

Controls and functions

15 En

INTRODUCTION

English

This section describes the functions of the remote control

used to control FM, XM Satellite Radio, or iPod when the

TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector

(7).

1 PRESET/TUNE

FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the

frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52).

2 Numeric buttons

FM, XM: Enter numbers.

3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station

number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52).

Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group

(A to E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the

input above.

XM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to select XM channels in

All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to

select the preset channel number (1 to 8) in Preset Search

mode. Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to select XM categories in

All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to

select the preset channel group (A to E) in Preset Search

mode. Use ENTER to confirm the input above (see pages

7 and 8 in the Reference Guide).

These functions are also available when this unit is playing back

your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide).

4 DISPLAY

XM and iPod: Displays information when this unit is

receiving an XM channel (see page 10 in the Reference

Guide) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the

Reference Guide).

5 MEMORY

FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51).

XM: Use to store the preset stations (see page 9 in the

Reference Guide).

6 SEARCH

FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see

page 49).

XM: Switches between search modes (All Channel

Search, Category Search, and Preset Search) (see pages 7

and 8 in the Reference Guide).

7 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when

operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your

TV or other AV components.

321

+10

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

Installation

16 En

This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this

unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which

procedure should come first. Especially when you make a connection over HDMI, we recommend that you make a

connection first before installation (see page 21).

This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected

sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The

surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be

sufficient when this unit is installed in the following

locations.

• Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound

beams

• Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls

• Rooms with measurements outside the following

range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to

11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft))

• Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening

position to this unit

• Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to

obstruct the path of sound beams

• Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls

• Rooms where the listening position is not in front of

this unit

• You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see

page 55) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not

fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position

is not directly facing toward the front of this unit).

• You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting 2-channel or 5-

channel stereo playback (see page 60) or My Beam (see

page 61) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not

fulfill the above conditions.

Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation

space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of

space above or below this unit.

• We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of

your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall

bracket, a rack, or a stand.

• This unit weighs 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz). Be sure to install this

unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an

earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children.

• When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this

unit directly above your TV.

• This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the

picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we

recommend moving this unit away from your TV.

Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as

furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise,

the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved.

You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the

corner.

Parallel installation

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Corner installation

Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the

adjacent walls.

Installation

Before installing this unit

5 cm (2 in) or more

Rear

Front

Side view

Notes

Installing this unit

An object, such as furniture

40° to 50°

An object, such as furniture

17 En

Installation

PREPARATION

English

■ Installation examples

Example 1

Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.

Example 2

Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.

Example 3

Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible.

18 En

Installation

■ Using a metal wall bracket

You can use the optional metal wall bracket to mount this

unit on the wall in your listening room.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for

details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to

attach this unit to the metal bracket.

■ Using a stand

You can mount your TV on a stand placed on a

commercially available rack and install this unit under

your TV.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on

how to install the stand or how to mount and the TV on the stand.

■ Using a rack

You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a

commercially available rack.

Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate

ventilation space around this unit (see page 16) and that it is

strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV.

■ Affixing this unit

Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners

and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this

unit and the top of the rack, etc.

• Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may

fall over and cause injury.

• Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing

the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will

weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as

a result.

112

670

4- 7

24- 7x22

325 65325

This unit

Metal wall bracket

YSP-3000

SPM-K30 (Option) (mm)

This unit

Stand

Note

Notes

When this unit is installed above your TV

When this unit is installed under your TV

This unit

Peel off

the film

Fasteners

Connections

19 En

PREPARATION

English

This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal:

For audio input

• 2 optical digital input jacks

• 2 coaxial digital input jacks

• 2 sets of analog input jacks

• 1 universal dock terminal

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

For audio/video input

• 2 HDMI input jacks

For audio output

• 1 subwoofer output jack

For audio/video output

• 1 HDMI output jack

For video output

• 1 analog output jack

Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable

TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, portable audio player, game console, and iPod. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to

this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components

to this unit, see pages 21 to 28.

• Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are

complete.

• Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit.

Connections

CAUTION

This unit

Audio connection

Video connection

VCR or game consoleDVD player Subwoofer Digital satellite tuner

or cable TV tuner

portable audio

player

20 En

Connections

■ Cables used for connections

HDMI cable

Audio pin cable (supplied)

Optical cable (supplied)

Digital audio pin cable (supplied)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable

Subwoofer pin cable

OSD video pin cable (supplied)

■ Notes on connecting the optical cable

• Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable.

When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put

the cap back in place.

• When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack,

make sure the direction is correct.

■ Affixing cables

To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the

supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward,

attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position,

and then affix cables in the cable clamp.

■ Information on HDMI™

Audio Signals

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video

and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of

DVD player.

• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or

DVI components.

• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m

(16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it.

• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack

↔ DVI-D jack) to connect

this unit to other DVI components.

■ Priority order for audio input signals

When multiple types of audio signals are simultaneously

being input from a single source component, this unit

plays back the audio signals in the following priority

order: HDMI → Digital → Analog

As default settings, the following input jacks are assigned

to the corresponding input sources:

Before connecting components

Audio/Video

Audio

Video

(White)

(Red)

(White)

(Red)

(Orange)(Orange)

(Yellow)(Yellow)

Cap

Input source Audio signal type

DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM

DVD audio

2-channel stereo

(up to 96 kHz/24 bit)

Blu-ray Disc

HD DVD

Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM

Notes

Input

jack

Input

source

HDMI Digital Analog

TV/STB

DVD

AUX 1

AUX 2

AUX 3

Optical cable

Attach to this unit

21 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

This unit is equipped with 2 HDMI input jacks and 1 HDMI output jack. If your TV and other components have HDMI

jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections, and you can skip the connection procedures from page 22 to

25. If your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner and an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack

on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.

• Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO

OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit.

• When HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see page 82) and this unit is in the standby mode, the signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are

not output at the HDMI OUT jack.

We recommend that you secure the HDMI cable(s) with adhesive tape, etc. once you have connected the HDMI cable(s) to the HDMI

jack(s) of this unit.

HDMI cable OSD video pin cable

Optical cable

Connections using HDMI cables

Notes

AUX 1

DVD

OUT

HDMI

A AA

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

Rear panel of this unit

Video

input

HDMI

output

HDMI

input

HDMI

output

DVD player/recorder

Digital satellite tuner,

cable TV tuner,

digital airwave tuner,

or game console

Optical

digital

output

This connection (except for a game

console) is not necessary if your

TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital

airwave tuner.

Audio/Video

Video

Audio

22 En

Connections

For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this

unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB

OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.

For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD

for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).

• If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals

input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO

INPUT jacks.

• Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO

OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit.

OSD video pin cable Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a TV

Notes

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Optical

digital

output

Video

input

Analog

audio

output

Video Audio

23 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on

this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on

your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital

audio connection.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).

• Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system

settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder.

• If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see

page 27).

Audio pin cable

Digital audio pin cable

Connecting a DVD player/recorder

Notes

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Coaxial

digital

output

Analog

audio

output

DVD player/recorder

Video signal to the TV

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

For the DVD/VCR combo

player/recorder

connection

Audio

24 En

Connections

Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV

tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Analog

audio

output

Optical

digital

output

Digital satellite tuner

or cable TV tuner

Video signal to the TV

This connection (except for a game console) is not

necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.

Audio

25 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical

digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit in addition

to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Connecting a digital airwave tuner

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Digital airwave tuner

Connect to the analog

audio output jacks on

the TV.

Optical

digital

output

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Video signal to the TV

This connection (except for a game console) is not

necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.

Audio

26 En

Connections

Connect the analog audio output jack on your portable audio player to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel of this

unit.

3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable

Connecting a portable audio player

AUX 3

Portable audio player

Front panel of this unit

Analog

audio

output

Audio

27 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component

(e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. If your component does not

support optical digital connections, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your component to the AUX 2 COAXIAL

DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.

If your component does not support any digital connections, connect the analog audio output jacks on your component

(e.g., VCR) to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.

To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).

If you make analog and digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at

the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT or AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input

at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks.

Audio pin cable

Optical cable

Digital audio pin cable

Connecting other external components

Note

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Optical

digital

output

Video signal to the TV

DVD player/recorder, VCR,

game console, CD player, etc.

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Analog

audio

output

Coaxial

digital

output

Audio

28 En

Connections

Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER OUT jack on this unit.

This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected

subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 35) or select SWFR for BASS

OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 78).

Subwoofer pin cable

Connecting a subwoofer

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Monaural

input

Subwoofer

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Audio

29 En

Connections

PREPARATION

English

Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit.

The IR IN terminal does not support normal external component connection. This is a control expansion terminal for

commercial use only.

Once all other connections are complete, plug the AC power supply cable into the AC wall outlet.

Connecting the FM antenna

DIGITAL INPUTOUT

TV/STB

DVD

SUBWOOFER

IR INXM

TV/STB

AUX 1 AUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

FM indoor antenna (supplied)

About the IR IN terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Connecting the AC power supply cable

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB

DVD

IR INXMAUX 1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

IR IN terminal

Rear panel of this unit

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

To the AC wall outlet

GETTING STARTED

30 En

1 Press and hold the mark on the battery

cover and then open the cover.

2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6,

UM-3) into the battery compartment.

Make sure you insert the batteries according to the

polarity markings (+/–).

3 Close the battery cover.

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases

or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked,

dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked

material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean

the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new

batteries.

• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose

of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.

• The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the

following cases:

– The remote control is left without batteries for more than two

minutes.

– Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control.

– The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed

when you change batteries.

• If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly

erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes

again.

Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and

point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit

during operation.

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places:

– places of high humidity, such as near a bath

– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove

– places of extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

• Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct

sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps.

• If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the

remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace

the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible.

Getting started

Installing batteries in the remote

control

Notes

Press

Operation range of the remote

control

Notes

45 45

Approximately

6 m (20 ft)

Getting started

31 En

SETUP

English

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

The volume level appears in the front panel display,

and the current input source and beam mode are

displayed.

2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to

the standby mode.

When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on

the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the

other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control

are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on.

Turning on this unit or

setting it to the standby mode

STANDBY/ON

VOLUME

INPUT

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

VOLUME 30

Current volume level

DVD MY SUR

Current input

source

Current beam

mode

Note

USING SET MENU

32 En

This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the

parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the

comfort of your own home.

1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is

connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit

to display the OSD of this unit.

2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

3 Turn on the power of your TV.

The following screen appears on your TV.

If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control

supplied with your TV to switch the video input until

the OSD appears.

Using SET MENU

Displaying the OSD (on-screen display)

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

OSD screen example

Push [MENU] to begin set-up

YSP-3000

Using SET MENU

33 En

SETUP

English

The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure.

The flow chart of SET MENU

Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).

See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35.

Look for a remedy.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of error

messages and possible remedies.

Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP.

See “Playback” on page 45, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54, and “Using sound field programs” on

page 63.

Run MANUAL SETUP.

See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72.

• If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for

SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 74) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 75) in

BEAM MENU.

• If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams,

adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 77).

If an error occurs

If you want to make additional settings

and adjustments

Run LANGUAGE SETUP.

See “Changing OSD language” on page 34.

CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE

34 En

This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more.

• You can also perform the following operations while

viewing information in the front panel display.

3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP,

and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select the desired language,

and press ENTER.

Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),

Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),

ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),

Русский (Russian)

Changing OSD language

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

Francais

ESPANOL

ITALIANO

NEDERLANDS

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

;LANGUAGE SETUP

ENTER

AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM)

35 En

SETUP

English

This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the

cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the

beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.

This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments

that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically.

Beam optimization:

This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment.

Sound optimization:

This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment.

This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize

all or part of the parameters.

The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM

OPTIMZ only is selected.

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

The flow chart of AUTO SETUP

*2 *3

Checking the environment of

your listening room

Optimizing the beam angle

Checking the subwoofer and

optimizing the beam delay,

frequency, and volume

Beam

optimization

Sound

optimization

Notes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

36 En

The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening

environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the

IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam

microphone and the walls in your listening room.

• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.

• The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

• Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization.

• An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room.

To avoid the possibility of an error:

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit.

– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit.

• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects

obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the

walls.

• The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are

seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the

sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 72) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed.

• If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to

this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set

the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of

this unit.

2 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam

microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on

the front panel.

3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat

level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper

or lower from the center height of the unit

with the IntelliBeam microphone facing

upward at your normal listening position.

Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an

imaginary center line drawn from this unit.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone

stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height

as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening

position.

Installing the IntelliBeam microphone

Notes

VOLUME

MIN MAX MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER

HIGH CUT

Subwoofer

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

INTELLIBEAM MIC

Note

IntelliBeam

microphone

More than

1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m (3.3 ft)

upper or lower

from the center

height

Cardboard

microphone stand

Sofa

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

37 En

SETUP

English

■ Assembling the supplied cardboard

microphone stand

You will find three separate parts (one circular part and

two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand

originally put together.

1 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard

microphone stand originally put together.

2 Insert one of the longitudinal part into the

crevice of the other longitudinal part.

3 Place the circular part on top of the two

combined longitudinal parts.

4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone

on top of the circular part.

Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to

this unit and properly placed in your listening room,

follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by

pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two

seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam

optimization and sound optimization procedures.

IntelliBeam

microphone

Center line

Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

789

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

YSP

TV/AV

STANDBY/ON

VOLUME

INPUT

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

38 En

• Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while

this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from

your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is

completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound

beams.

• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if

this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before

installing this unit” on page 16. In such cases, run MANUAL

SETUP (see page 72) to manually adjust the corresponding

parameters.

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP

procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen.

See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for

appropriate remedies.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes

maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP

procedure is run successfully.

• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend

following the procedure below.

1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.

2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only.

3. Close the curtains.

4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP

procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according

to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be

recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your

listening environment (see page 43).

1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of

this unit.

If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the

power of the subwoofer.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again.

• You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure

simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more

than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the

screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the

AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Notes

STANDBY/ON

Front panel

Remote control

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

2)BEAM OPTIMZ only

3)SOUND OPTIMZ only

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;AUTO SETUP

ENTER

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

39 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND

OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND

OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ

(Beam optimization and sound optimization)

Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and

quality so that the parameters best match your listening

environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you make settings for the first time.

• If the unit has been relocated.

• If your listening room has been restructured.

• If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)

have been rearranged.

This menu takes about three minutes.

BEAM OPTIMZ only

(Beam optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best

matches your listening environment.

This menu takes about one minute.

SOUND OPTIMZ only

(Sound optimization only)

Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so

that the parameters best match your listening environment.

It is recommended that you should select this optimization

feature in the following cases:

• If you have opened or closed the curtains in your

listening room before using this unit.

• If you have manually set the beam angle.

This menu takes about two minutes.

You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only

procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure.

6 Check the following points once again before

starting the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to

this unit?

• Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper

location?

• Are there any large obstacles in between the

IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your

listening room?

7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP

procedure.

The following screen appears on your TV and the

AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds.

Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO

SETUP procedure.

If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an

error message is displayed. See “Error messages for

AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of

error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the

instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP

procedure again.

Note

ENTER

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

Measurement takes about 3min.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP

Will begin in 10sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

AUTO SETUP START

ENTER

← Flashes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

40 En

8 Check that the following screen is displayed

on your TV.

The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are

displayed on your TV.

• If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is

displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP

procedure again. For details, see step 9.

• If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed

even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit,

increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the

AUTO SETUP procedure again.

• Depending on the environment of your listening room,

the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left

and right may be set to the same value even if

“5 BEAM” is displayed as a result.

9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press

RETURN to cancel the results.

The following screen is displayed for two seconds

and then disappears from your TV.

If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in

step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing

ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages

for AUTO SETUP” on page 41. Press ENTER to exit

AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from

step 3.

10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from

the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front

panel.

If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system

memory” on page 42.

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 1

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED]

BEAM MODE :5 BEAM

SUBWOOFER :YES

[ENTER]:Save set-up.

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.

SHOW RESULT

Example 2

←

Flashes

ENTER

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Your YSP unit may not be set

up correctly.

We recommend you try again.

Please press [ENTER] key to

exit.

←

Flashes

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

41 En

SETUP

English

■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP

Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts

While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress

If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP

procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case

you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the

screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

connected to this unit.

Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to

this unit.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

ERROR E-1

Please test in quieter environment.

There is too much unwanted noise in

your listening room.

Make sure that your listening room is as

quiet as possible. You may want to

choose certain hours during the day

when there is not much noise coming

from outside.

—

ERROR E-2

No MIC detected. Please check

MIC connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone was

disconnected while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit.

ERROR E-3

Unexpected control is detected.

Please re-try.

Some other operations were performed

on this unit while the AUTO SETUP

procedure was in progress.

Do not perform any other operations

while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in

progress.

—

ERROR E-4

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set in front of YSP.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in front of this unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed in front of this

unit.

ERROR E-5

Please check MIC position. MIC

should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft.

The IntelliBeam microphone is not

placed in the right distance from this

unit.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is installed more than 1.8 m

(6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and

within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height

of this unit.

ERROR E-6

Volume level is lower than

expected. Please check MIC

position/connection and re-try.

The IntelliBeam microphone cannot

collect the sound produced by this unit

because the sound output level is too low.

Make sure that the IntelliBeam

microphone is firmly connected to this

unit and placed in a proper location. If

the problem persists, contact the nearest

authorized Yamaha service center for

assistance.

ERROR E-7

Unexpected error happened.

Please re-try.

An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.

—

USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY

42 En

You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU

in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save

certain settings according to the varying conditions of

your listening environment. For example, if there are

curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of

the sound beams will vary depending on whether the

curtains are open or closed.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select SAVE and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

Using the system memory

Convenient usage of the system

memory

Saving settings

When the curtains are

open

When the curtains are

closed

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

Using the system memory

43 En

SETUP

English

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters

are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU

screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on

page 42 according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MEMORY and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

MEMORY1 Save Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Save

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

MEMORY1 Saving

2)MEMORY SAVE

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

Loading settings

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)LOAD

2)SAVE

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MEMORY

ENTER

Using the system memory

44 En

4 Press / to select LOAD and press

ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

5 Press / to select MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

6 Press ENTER again.

The new parameters saved as MEMORY1,

MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the

parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET

MENU screen.

7 Press MENU to exit.

The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.

ENTER

MEMORY1

MEMORY2

MEMORY3

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Enter

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Load Now ?

Push [ENTER] to Load

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

MEMORY1 Loading

1)MEMORY LOAD

ENTER

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

PLAYBACK

45 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can play back sound from the components connected

to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel

repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons

(TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3) on the remote

control. The name of the selected input source and the

type of corresponding input mode appear in the front

panel display.

■ Front panel operations

Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

toggle between TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, and

AUX3.

The name of the corresponding input source and the type

of current input mode are displayed in the front panel

display.

■ Remote control operations

In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV

components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate

remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/

AV to change the control area (see page 96).

Press TV to play back a TV program.

Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast.

Press DVD to play back a DVD.

Playback

Selecting the input source

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

DOCK

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

MY SUR.

STANDBY/ON

VOLUME

INPUT

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

TV/STB AUTO

Name of the selected

input source

Type of the selected

input mode

STB

TV/STB AUTO

DVD

DVD AUTO

46 En

Playback

Press AUX1 (or AUX2) to play back a component

connected to the AUX 1 (or AUX 2) jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

Press AUX3 to play back a component connected

to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel.

Once an input source is selected (see page 45), you can

play back the selected input source.

This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback

source.

For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective

owner’s manual.

1 Turn on the power of your DVD player.

2 Switch to the video input on your TV using

the remote control supplied with the TV and

display the DVD menu screen.

If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no

sound is heard.

3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the

supplied remote control.

Audio signals from your DVD player are output from

this unit.

• You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the

digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital

connection (optical/coaxial/HDMI). The input channel and LFE

indicators light up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal

input at the optical/coaxial/HDMI jack. If the indicator

lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream

output, DTS output, and/or HDMI output of the DVD player.

• If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit

to around 45.

• If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your

TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied

with this unit to operate these components. For details on how

to set remote control codes, see page 96.

Playing back sources

Note

AUX1

AUX1 AUTO

AUX3

Note

DVD

PCM

47 En

Playback

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the

volume level.

The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front

panel display.

Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99,

MAX (maximum)

• The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel

as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time.

• One volume level increases or decreases each time you press

VOLUME +/–.

• You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if

you press and hold VOLUME +/–.

■ Muting the sound

1 Press MUTE to mute the sound.

“AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel

display, and the volume level indicator flashes.

2 Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to

resume the sound output.

“AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the

front panel display (or the numeric value of the

current volume level appears if you press VOLUME

+/–), and the volume level indicator lights up.

The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as

well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time.

You can select whether the sound output is to be muted

completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 78).

Adjusting the volume

Notes

STANDBY/ON

VOLUME

INPUT

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

VOLUME

VOLUME 30

Front panel

Remote control

Note

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

DVD 5BEAM

MUTE

AUDIO MUTE ON

Flashes

AUDIO MUTE OFF

VOLUME

Lights up

MUTE

FM TUNING

48 En

There are two tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signal is strong and

there is no interference. If the radio signal is weak, tune into the FM station manually. You can also use the automatic and

manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations in total (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station

numbers each).

• This section exceptionally uses the remote control for Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models.

• When the operation mode selector is set to TV/AV, you can operate all FM functions. When the operation mode selector is set to YSP,

you can only operate the functions described in “Selecting a preset station” (see page 52).

Orient the connected FM antenna for the best reception.

■ Remote control functions

Set the operation mode selector (8) to TV/AV before

tuning or preset tuning.

1 FM

Selects FM as the input source. This unit is tuned into the

last selected FM station.

U.S.A. and Canada models use FM/XM.

2 PRESET/TUNE

Switches between the preset search mode and the

frequency search mode (see page 51).

3 Numeric buttons

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select the preset station

numbers (see page 52).

4 ENTRY ( / )

• Selects the preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the

colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display

(see page 52).

• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not

displayed in the front panel display (see page 49).

5 A-E ( / )

Selects the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 51).

U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .

6 MEMORY

• Stores a preset station in the memory (see page 51).

• Hold down this button for more than three seconds to

start automatic preset tuning (see page 50).

7 SEARCH

Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator

is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is

turned off) (see page 49).

8 Operation mode selector

Selects the operation mode of this unit.

FM tuning

Note

FM controls and functions

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

A-E

(Europe, Australia, Asia, and

Korea models)

49 En

FM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Automatic tuning is effective when the radio station

signals are strong and there is no interference.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO

indicator lights up in the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) once to begin

automatic tuning.

When this unit is tuned into an FM station, the

TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the

station appears in the front panel display.

• Press to tune into a higher frequency.

• Press to tune into a lower frequency.

If the desired FM station signal is weak, tune into it

manually.

Manual tuning automatically switches the tuner to the monaural

reception mode to increase the signal quality.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

Automatic tuning

YSP

TV/AV

A FM 88.9 MHz

Lights up

No colon (:)

Manual tuning

Note

ENTER

ENTRY

YSP

TV/AV

50 En

FM tuning

3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO

indicator disappears from the front panel

display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the

colon (:) off.

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to tune into the

desired station manually.

Hold down the button for quick search.

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up

to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 5 preset

station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). You

can recall the preset stations easily by selecting the preset

station groups and numbers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than three

seconds.

The preset station group and number, the MEMORY

indicator, and the AUTO indicator flash. Automatic

preset tuning starts from the current frequency and

proceeds toward higher frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• When you overwrite an existing preset station, the

previously stored FM station is cleared.

• If the number of automatically preset stations does not

reach 40 (E8), this unit automatically stops searching.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are preset

automatically. If the desired station is weak in signal

strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in

“Manual preset tuning” on page 51.

Automatic preset tuning

A FM 88.9 MHz

No colon (:)

ENTER

ENTRY

YSP

TV/AV

Notes

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Flashes

MEMORY

51 En

FM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 5 preset

station groups with 8 preset station numbers each)

manually.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Tune into the desired FM station.

See page 49 for tuning instructions.

3 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for approximately 10 seconds.

4 Press A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a

preset station group (A to E) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

The selected preset station group letter appears.

Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel

display.

• If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to

display the colon.

• U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT

for U.S.A. and Canada models).

5 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

• You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired

preset station number.

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset number by pressing / .

6 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display together with the station band and

frequency. The MEMORY indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

• When you overwrite an existing preset station, the

previously stored FM station is cleared.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along

with the station frequency.

Manual preset tuning

YSP

TV/AV

Flashes

MEMORY

A :FM 88.9 MHz

ENTER

A-E

Preset

station

group

Colon (:)

Flashes

Notes

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

Preset station number

ENTER

ENTRY

Flashes

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

The displayed station has been stored as A1.

MEMORY

52 En

FM tuning

You can tune into the preset stations simply by selecting

the preset station groups and numbers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.

“FM” appears in the front panel display.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select FM as the input source.

• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM

again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).

3 Press A-E ( / ) to select the desired

preset station group (A to E).

The preset station group letter appears in the front

panel display and changes each time you press the

button.

• If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to

display the colon.

• U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT

for U.S.A. and Canada models).

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select the desired

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset station group and number appear in the

front panel display together with the station band and

frequency.

• You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired

preset station number.

• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you

can select the desired preset number by pressing / .

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by

FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio

Data System information: PS (program service), PTY

(program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The

corresponding indicators light up in the front panel

display.

• You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when

the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the

front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive

all of the Radio Data System data from the station.

• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit

may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In

particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and

may not be available even when the other Radio Data System

display modes are available.

• In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired

station manually (see page 49).

• In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference

while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the

reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in

the front panel display.

• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT

WAIT” appears in the front panel display.

Selecting a preset station

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

A-E

Displaying the Radio Data System

information (Europe model only)

Notes

ENTER

ENTRY

A1:FM 88.9 MHz

53 En

FM tuning

BASIC

OPERATION

English

1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into

the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see

page 50).

The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency

display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station

broadcasts the PS data.

2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to select the

desired Radio Data System display mode.

• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data

System program.

• Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data

System program.

• Select “RT” to display the information on the

Radio Data System program.

• Select “CT” to display the current time.

In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a

maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the

umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with

the “_” (underscore).

Note

CTRTPTYPS

Frequency display

DISPLAY

Program type Descriptions

NEWS

News

AFFAIRS

Current affairs

INFO

General information

SPORT

Sport

EDUCATE

Education

DRAMA

Drama

CULTURE

Culture

SCIENCE

Science

VARIED

Light entertainment

POP M

Pop music

ROCK M

Rock music

M.O.R.M

Middle-of-the-road music

LIGHT M

Light classical

CLASSICS

Serious classical

OTHER M

Other music

ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND

54 En

You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote

control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback.

• When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected.

• To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that

the parameters best match your listening environment.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press one of the beam mode buttons

(5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to

select the desired beam mode for 5.1-

channel play back.

Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right,

center, surround left, and surround right channels. This

mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the

fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel

format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel

format.

Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam.

• To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there

are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the

objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly

off the walls in your listening room.

• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls

in your listening room.

• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if

INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR

CORNER (see page 74).

Enjoying surround sound

Notes

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY SUR.

5 Beam

Notes

5BEAM

55 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

Outputs normal sound from the front left and right

channels and sound beams from the center and surround

left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching

live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds

can be heard close to the center of the listening position

while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard

on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are

sitting right in front of the stage.

Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam.

The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward

the listening position.

Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and

center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies

with the whole family. Because the listening position area

is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround

sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this

mode when the listening position is close to the backside

of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams

cannot be reflected off the wall.

Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam.

You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust

settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 77).

• When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and

right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and

right channels.

• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls

in your listening room.

• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if

INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR

CORNER (see page 74).

This mode enables surround system in a small listening

area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions

for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on

page 16). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy

surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam

modes are unavailable.

Press MY SUR. to select My Surround.

• Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are

ineffective in this mode.

• For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must

face toward the front of this unit.

Stereo plus 3 Beam

Note

3 Beam

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

Notes

My Surround

Notes

MY SUR.

56 En

Enjoying surround sound

■ Decoder indicators

Depending on the input source and the selected surround

mode, the decoder indicators in the front panel display

light up as follows:

• You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by

pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 87).

• Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital

EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS

or Dolby Digital.

■ Input channel indicators

Depending on the channel component of the current

digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the

front panel display light up as follows:

■ Surround modes and recommended

sources

• When you select an input source (see page 45), the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source is

automatically selected.

• If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround

mode used for the previously selected input source before the

power was turned off is automatically selected.

• If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in

the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE.

• The surround modes are available:

– when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the 2-

channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 60) and My

Surround (see page 55).

– when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off

(see page 65).

– when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP

program (see page 64). In this case, only Dolby Pro Logic,

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are

available.

– when 2-channel signals are being input.

– when the Music Enhancer is turned off (see page 66).

Status Indicator

When PCM signals are being input

When DTS digital signals are being

input

When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the

surround mode

When Dolby Digital signals are

being input

When Dolby Pro Logic is selected

as the surround mode

When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected

as the surround mode

Status Indicator

When 2-channel stereo signals are

being input

When 5.1-channel signals are being

input

PCM

DIGITAL

Surround mode

Recommended

source

Dolby Pro Logic – All sources

Dolby Pro Logic II

Movie

Music

Game

Movies

Music

Games

DTS Neo:6

Cinema

Music

Movies

Music

Neural Surround

(U.S.A. and

Canada models

only)

–

XM Satellite Radio

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Notes

57 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel

playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound

effects by switching the surround mode.

The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP

programs are turned off (see page 65) or when the movie program

is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 64). In

addition, the beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3

Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 54), while the Music Enhancer must

be also turned off (see page 66).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press

SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to

switch between surround modes.

Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC,

PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, neural surround

Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema

Enjoying 2-channel sources

in surround sound

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

Neo:6 Cinema

Neo:6 Music

PRO LOGIC

PLII Movie

PLII

Music

PLII

Game

neural surround

Example of the surround

mode display in the front

panel display when the

CINEMA DSP program

and the Music Enhancer

are turned off

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

58 En

Enjoying surround sound

You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV

in real surround sound.

Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to

30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below.

1 Select the TV channel you want to watch.

To select a TV channel, use the remote control

supplied with your TV.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press TV.

This unit outputs audio signals from your TV.

4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers,

reduce the volume level of your TV until you

can no longer hear any audio being output.

To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote

control supplied with your TV.

5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume

level.

6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press

SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to

switch between surround modes.

Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back

in multi-channels.

For more information on surround modes, see

page 56.

Enjoying TV in surround sound

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

STB

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

VOLUME

SUR. DECODE

ENTER

59 En

Enjoying surround sound

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II

Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround

sound effect.

1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel

sources in surround sound” on page 57 and

select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music.

2 Press / to select the parameter.

3 Press / to configure the selected

parameter.

■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is

selected

PANORAMA

Gives the front left and right channel sound a

wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire

surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling.

Choices: ON/OFF

Default setting: OFF

DIMENSION

Adjusts the difference in volume between the front

and surround channels to the desired volume balance.

Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to

+3 (toward the front direction)

Default setting: STD (standard)

C. WIDTH

Distributes the center channel sound to the left and

right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is

output only from the center channel.

Control range: 0 to 7

Default setting: 3

■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected

C. IMAGE

Adjusts the center image from three channels (front

left and right and center) to varying degrees.

Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center)

Default setting: 0.3

Adjusting surround mode

parameters

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

ENTER

ENJOYING STEREO SOUND

60 En

You can enjoy 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control.

• When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes

compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam.

• When the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56) and the CINEMA

DSP programs (see page 63) become ineffective.

Sounds are output from the front right and left channels.

This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs,

and can be used to replace your TV speakers.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press STEREO to select the 2-channel stereo

playback as the beam mode.

“STEREO” appears in the front panel display.

When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except

those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and

output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output

from the center and surround channels.

Sounds are output from front left and right, center, and

surround left and right. This is ideal for playback in a large

listening area or at a party.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press STEREO twice to select the 5-channel

stereo playback as the beam mode.

“5CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display.

Enjoying stereo sound

Notes

2-channel stereo playback

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

Note

5-channel stereo playback

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

5CH STEREO

PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM)

61 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound

beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want

the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people

while enjoying music or movies at night.

If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63), and TruBass

(see page 79) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit.

The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects

the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be

automatically adjusted.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two

seconds.

A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep

pointing the remote control toward this unit while the

test tones are being output so that the My Beam

microphone can collect the test tones.

Control range: L60° to R60°

Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L45° to R45°

• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM

ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display.

• An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure

that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test

tones are being output.

• Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are

being output.

• Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control

while the test tones are being output.

• The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote

control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the

batteries and then try the procedure again.

• When the input signal with 64 kHz or 96 kHz of sampling

frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be

automatically adjusted.

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)

Note

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

My Beam

microphone

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Using auto-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

Notes

62 En

Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)

You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing

back an input source. This function is also ideal if the

listening position is out of the operation guarantee range

of the auto-adjust function.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MY BEAM.

“MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display.

3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to

adjust the beam angle.

Control range: L90° to R90°

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the left side.

• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle

on the right side.

Using manual-adjust function

YSP

TV/AV

MY BEAM

ENTER

ANGLE 0

USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

63 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from

stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing)

chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP

programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and

movie theaters.

The Yamaha CINEMA DSP programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.

Choose a CINEMA DSP program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the CINEMA DSP program

itself.

■ What is a sound field?

A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument is the multiple reflections from the walls of the

room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well

as the size and shape of the room in which the listener is sitting.

■ Elements of a sound field

In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections combined with the direct sound coming straight to

our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field.

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one

surface only (from the ceiling or the wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous

that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct

sound.

Direct sound, early reflections, and subsequent reverberations all together help us determine the subjective size and shape

of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create the sound fields.

With the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you can create your own

listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a

listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with

the CINEMA DSP technology.

Using sound field programs

Note

64 En

Using sound field programs

You can select from three different CINEMA DSP

programs (MUSIC, MOVIE, and SPORTS) depending on

the type of source you want to enjoy. The CINEMA DSP

indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of

the CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

• The CINEMA DSP programs are ineffective when My

Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.

• If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit”

appears in the front panel display when you press one of the

CINEMA DSP program buttons on the remote control.

■ Music program

Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back

music sources. This program produces a vibrant

atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an

actual rock or jazz concert hall.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MUSIC to select the music CINEMA

DSP program.

■ Movie program

Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back

movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby

Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround. This program clearly

reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad

and expansive cinematic space amid silence.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MOVIE to select the movie CINEMA

DSP program.

■ Sports program

Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back

sports sources. This program densely concentrates the

vocal sound of the commentator in the center while

broadening the sound from the audience or the

environment all around your listening room.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SPORTS to select the sports CINEMA

DSP program.

CINEMA DSP programs

Notes

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

MUSIC

YSP

TV/AV

MOVIE

YSP

TV/AV

SPORTS

65 En

Using sound field programs

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Turning off CINEMA DSP programs

Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy

the original sound without the CINEMA DSP program

effect.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press OFF to turn off the CINEMA DSP

programs.

“CINEMA DSP OFF” is displayed in the front panel

display and the CINEMA DSP indicator disappears.

■ Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level

of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the

direct sound so that each CINEMA DSP program can

reflect your listening environment and your preference

even more accurately.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE, or SPORTS to select

the desired CINEMA DSP program.

3 Press / .

“DSP LEVEL” is displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press / to adjust the effect level of the

selected CINEMA DSP program.

Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB

• A larger value increases the effect level.

• A smaller value decreases the effect level.

YSP

TV/AV

OFF

CINEMA DSP OFF

YSP

TV/AV

SPORTS

MOVIE

MUSIC

or or

DSP LEVEL 0dB

ENTER

ENTRY

ENTER

USING THE MUSIC ENHANCER

66 En

You can use the Music Enhancer of this unit to improve the sound nearest to the original depth and width of compression

artifacts such as the MP3 format.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press ENHANCER to select the Music

Enhancer.

The currently selected mode appears in the front

panel display.

3 Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch

between the Music Enhancer levels (OFF,

MIN, and MAX).

The ENHANCER indicator lights up when

“ENHANCER:HIGH” or “ENHANCER:LOW” is

selected.

• The Music Enhancer is not compatible with the CINEMA DSP

programs. If a CINEMA DSP program is selected while the

Music Enhancer is on, the Music Enhancer is turned off

automatically. In this case, the Music Enhancer remains off

even after the CINEMA DSP program is canceled. Likewise, if

the Music Enhancer is turned on while a CINEMA DSP

program is selected, the CINEMA DSP program is canceled

automatically. In this case, the CINEMA DSP program remains

off even after the Music Enhancer is turned off.

• The Music Enhancer is available only when a setting other than

My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.

Using the music enhancer

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

ENHANCER

Notes

ENHANCER:HIGH

ENHANCER:LOW

ENHANCER OFF

ENHANCER

Lights up

USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE)

67 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit

the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast

change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.).

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select

NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL

VOLUME, or OFF.

The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel

display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or

“NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected.

The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel

display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music

sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV

programs.

• Select OFF to turn off the volume mode.

3 Press / to adjust the effect level of

compression while NIGHT:CINEMA,

NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is

displayed.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression.

• Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum

compression.

• The volume mode settings are canceled if you press

STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from

the AC wall outlet.

• The volume mode settings become ineffective when My

Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 55).

Using the volume mode

(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode)

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

NIGHT:CINEMA

NIGHT:MUSIC

TV EQUAL VOLUME

OFF

VOL MODE

Lights up

Notes

Lights up

Effect.Lvl:MIN

Effect.Lvl:MID

Effect.Lvl:MAX

ENTER

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

68 En

Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is

useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval

for the sleep timer.

Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF

The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel

display while switching the interval for the sleep

timer.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display

changes as shown below.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated.

Using the sleep timer

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

MY SUR.

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

Flashes

SLEEP

SLEEP 120min

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60min

SLEEP 30min

SLEEP OFF

Lights up

69 En

Using the sleep timer

BASIC

OPERATION

English

■ Canceling the sleep timer

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”

appears in the front panel display.

3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel

display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated.

The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is

stored in the system memory.

The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press

STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the

AC power supply cable from the AC outlet.

Note

YSP

TV/AV

SLEEP

SLEEP OFF

Disappears

DISPLAYING THE INPUT SOURCE INFORMATION

70 En

You can display the format and sampling frequency of the current input signal in the front panel display.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press DISPLAY.

The information on the current input signal is

displayed as follows:

When the input signal is unclear, “___” is displayed for the

sampling frequency.

Displaying the input source information

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

Input signal Indicator

Sampling

frequency

Dolby digital DOLBY DGTL

32/44.1/48/64/

88.2/96 kHz

DTS DTS

PCM PCM

Analog ANALOG –

DISPLAY

D.DGTL:48kHz

INPUT SIGNAL

DOLBY DGTL:48kHz

USING THE HDMI CONTROL FEATURE

71 En

BASIC

OPERATION

English

You can operate the following functions using the remote control supplied with your TV if this unit and an HDMI

control-compatible TV (except some models) are connected via HDMI.

• Turning on or off the power (synchronized operation with the TV)

• Selecting the audio output component (TV or this unit)

• Adjusting the volume level (up/down and mute)

An example of the HDMI control-compatible component is a Panasonic EZ Sync (for U.S.A. and Canada) or Viera Link

(for other countries)-compatible component (TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, etc.).

If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the

connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models).

1 Connect this unit to your HDMI control-compatible TV via HDMI.

For details about HDMI and HDMI components, see “Information on HDMI™” on page 20 and “Connections using

HDMI cables” on page 21. Also in the owner’s manual supplied with your TV, refer to the information on

connecting an AV amplifier.

2 Turn on the power of all components connected via HDMI.

For details about controlling external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components.

3 Check the system settings for all components connected via HDMI and activate the HDMI control

feature.

For details about setting external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. Once you

have followed steps 1 to 3, you do not need to carry out the same procedure again next time.

4 Turn off the power of your TV and then turn on the power again.

5 Set the input source selector of your TV to this unit (HDMI, etc.).

6 Select the connected component as the input source by pressing INPUT on the front panel of this

unit (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Confirm that the video

image played back on the DVD recorder (etc.) appears in your TV correctly.

7 Use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output

component, and adjust the volume level of this unit.

• Check the following if you cannot operate this unit in synchronization with your TV.

– Whether HDMI CONTROL is set to ON (see page 82).

– Whether the HDMI control feature is activated for your TV (see the owner’s manual supplied with your TV).

• While you are playing back audio from a non-HDMI component, turning off the power of your TV with the remote control

supplied with your TV does not turn off the power of this unit. Playback continues without being affected.

Using the HDMI control feature

Notes

MANUAL SETUP

72 En

To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment

parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the

initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment.

• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according to the

specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening

environment (see page 43).

• Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 35). Use

SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments.

• BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu.

• Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU,

and DISPLAY MENU.

SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output.

BEAM MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output.

INPUT MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input.

DISPLAY MENU

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display.

MANUAL SETUP

Item Features Page

TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound.

SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings.

MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level.

AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay.

ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room.

DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer.

Item Features Page

SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings.

BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings.

IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels.

Item Features Page

INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source.

INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source.

INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source.

HDMI SET Adjusts the various HDMI settings.

XM ANTENNA LEVEL

(U.S.A. and Canada

models only)

Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signal.

Item Features Page

F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings.

OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings.

UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement.

73 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press MENU.

The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.

• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at

the bottom of the screen.

• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,

press RETURN.

• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once

more.

• You can also perform the following operations in the front

panel display.

3 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and

press ENTER.

The following screen appears on your TV.

4 Press / to select a sub menu and press

ENTER.

5 Press / / / and ENTER to configure

each parameter.

6 Press MENU to exit.

The OSD disappears from your TV screen.

Using MANUAL SETUP

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

;MEMORY

;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

;LANGUAGE SETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

SET MENU

ENTER

1)SOUND MENU

2)BEAM MENU

3)INPUT MENU

4)DISPLAY MENU

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

;MANUAL SETUP

ENTER

74 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the sound beam output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in

“Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 84).

■ SETTING PARAMETERS

(Setting parameters)

Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room

and the distance of this unit from the listening position.

When you make settings for each parameter, other related

parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your

listening environment.

If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam

optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will

be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made

in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust

settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 75).

INSTALLED POSITION

(Installed position of this unit)

Use to adjust the installed position of this unit.

Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation),

ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER

(Corner installation)

• Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in

parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the

width and length of your listening room as well as the

distance of the listening position from this unit and the

distance of the center of this unit from the left wall.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from the left wall:

0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft)

BEAM MENU

Note

A)SETTING PARAMETERS

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

C)IMAGE LOCATION

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

2)BEAM MENU

INSTALLED POSITION

;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3

FLAT TO WALL

ANGLE TO WALL

OR CORNER

Listening position

from the left wall

Listening position

from the unit

Room width

Room length

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

-------[ 5.4m ]-

4.9m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

--------|

2.7m [ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and

length

Listening position

from the unit and

the left wall

75 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

• Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is

installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust

the width and length of your listening room as well as

the distance of the listening position from this unit.

Choices for the room width and length:

2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)

Choices for the listening position from this unit:

1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)

When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in

MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), the parameters newly set for

the width and length of your listening room are automatically set

as the factory default value.

■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment)

Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings.

We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode

before adjusting these parameters (see page 54).

• When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL

SETUP (see page 74), the factory default value is automatically

set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see

page 76).

• Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 54 and 60),

some channel positions may not be available for selection. In

this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as

the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be

output from the front left and right channels.

HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle)

Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each

channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound

beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test

tone is automatically output.

Choices: L90° to R90°

Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output

to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the

right.

Note

Listening position

from the unit

Room length

Room width

----- 5.4m ---

[ 5.4m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3

[ 2.5m ]

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3

Room width and

length

Listening

position from the

unit

Notes

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE

b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

c)FOCAL LENGTH

d)TREBLE GAIN

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT

( )

(+)

( )

5 beam

Front L L90 R90

L65deg

0(deg)

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE 1/5

76 En

MANUAL SETUP

BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length)

A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound

from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the

listening position at the same time. This menu sets the

distance that sound beams travel after being output and

reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening

position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective

channel.

The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance.

Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)

• Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel

sound beams travel.

• Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel

sound beams travel.

• Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound

beams travel.

• Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left

channel sound beams travel.

• Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right

channel sound beams travel.

We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO

SETUP (see page 35). Adjust this parameter only when you

changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 75).

FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length)

Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the

focal point of output for each channel to achieve an

expansive feeling for each channel.

The focal points except for the center channel should be

set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the

distance, the larger the expansion.

Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft)

Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and

adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the

normal position.

• Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound

beams.

• Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right

sound beams.

• Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound

beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m (–1.5 ft)

• Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround

left sound beams.

• Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround

right sound beams.

We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m (or 1.5 ft))

for the center channel.

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;;6.0m

Front R;;;;;;;6.0m

Center;;;;;;;;2.5m

Surround L;;;;9.1m

Surround R;;;;9.1m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH

focal length

focal point

sweet spot

Front left channel Center channel

5 beam

Front L;;;;;;+1.5m

Front R;;;;;;+1.5m

Center;;;;;;;-0.5m

Surround L;;;+2.3m

Surround R;;;+2.3m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

c)FOCAL LENGTH

77 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain)

Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each

channel.

If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left

and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically

absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround

sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams.

Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

• Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

front left channel.

• Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

front right channel.

• Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the

center channel.

• Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level

of the surround left channel.

• Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level

of the surround right channel.

■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location)

Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and

right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be

heard closer to the center channel.

Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound

coming from the front left and right channels seems

unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the

center of your listening room.

You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5

Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 54).

Choices: ON, OFF

Setting range: 0% to 95%

Initial setting: 0%

LEFT (Left)

Adjusts audio signals toward the left.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

RIGHT (Right)

Adjusts audio signals toward the right.

The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the

center.

- +

Front L;;;;;;;;0dB

Front R;;;;;;;;0dB

Center;;;;;;;;;0dB

Surround L;;;;;0dB

Surround R;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

d)TREBLE GAIN

------

OFF )ON

LCR

LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0%

RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0%

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)IMAGE LOCATION

Without adjustment

With the front left

channel adjusted

Without adjustment

With the front right

channel adjusted

78 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the sound output.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU

■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control)

You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams.

TREBLE (Treble)

Use to adjust the high-frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

BASS (Bass)

Use to adjust the low-frequency response.

Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB

Initial setting: 0 dB

■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings)

Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer

settings.

BASS OUT (Bass out)

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer or the front left and right channels. This setting

also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect)

signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer.

• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front left and right channels.

CROSS OVER (Crossover)

When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this

feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all low-

frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected

frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position.

Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz

LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level)

Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency

special effects which are only added to certain scenes.

This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby

Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

DISTANCE (Distance)

Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the

listening position.

Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft)

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level)

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

volume level.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by

20 dB.

SOUND MENU

A)TONE CONTROL

B)SUBWOOFER SET

C)MUTE LEVEL

D)AUDIO DELAY

E)ROOM EQ

F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

G)TruBass

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

1)SOUND MENU

TREBLE;;;;;0dB

BASS;;;;;;;0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)TONE CONTROL

------

BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT

CROSS OVER;;;100Hz

LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB

DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)SUBWOOFER SET

MUTE -20dB

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)MUTE LEVEL

01EN_YSP-3000_UA.book Page 78 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:36 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

79 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay)

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 msec

■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer)

Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room

when the unit is mounted on the wall.

Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type),

REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)

MOUNTING (Mounting type)

Use to enhance medium to low range sounds.

Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount)

• Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your

listening room.

• Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in

your listening room.

REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)

Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room.

Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo)

• Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal

reflectivity.

• Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly

reflective surfaces such as concrete walls.

■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range

(Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and

DTS signals)

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression.

This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding

Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the

difference between the smallest sound that can be heard

above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound

that can be heard without distortion.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Select to adjust the dynamic range compression.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX for feature films.

■ TruBass

Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS

TruBass technology improves bass even without a

subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence

of a subwoofer.

Choices: OFF, ON

TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 61) or My

Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.

AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

D)AUDIO DELAY

MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF

REFLECTING;;;NORMAL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

)ROOM EQ

Note

MIN STD MAX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range

OFF ON

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

G)TruBass

80 En

MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the audio and video input.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU

“F) XM ANTENNA LEVEL” is for U.S.A. and Canada models

only.

■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment)

Use to assign the HDMI IN jacks of this unit to other

components if the initial settings of this unit do not

correspond to your needs. By assigning other components

to the HDMI IN jacks of this unit, you can display the

names of the connected components in the front panel

display and OSD and operate the components with the

input selector buttons of the same name. If you connect a

component to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit and

do not assign a name to it, the default component name for

HDMI IN jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD

when selected.

• Select HDMI1 to assign a component to the HDMI

AUX 1 IN jack of this unit.

Choices: TV/STB, AUX1

• Select HDMI2 to assign a component to the HDMI

DVD IN jack of this unit.

Choices: DVD, AUX2

■ INPUT MODE (Input mode)

Use to designate the input mode for the input sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

the power of this unit. For information on the types of

audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting

the input mode” on page 87.

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the

type of input signals and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that input source. If the type of

input signals is different from the setting, no sounds

will be produced.

■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim)

Use to adjust the input level of the input source.

• Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT

jacks of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio

and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL

DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL

INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

INPUT MENU

Note

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

B)INPUT MODE

C)INPUT TRIM

D)INPUT RENAME

E)HDMI SET

F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

3)INPUT MENU

HDMI

HDMI1;;;; AUX1

( AUX1 )

HDMI2;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT

AUTO LAST

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

B)INPUT MODE

TV/STB ANALOG;;;-3.0dB

DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

DVD DIGITAL;;-3.0dB

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

C)INPUT TRIM 1/2

81 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

• Select AUX1 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks

of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX1 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL

INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX2 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and

video signals input at the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL

INPUT jack of this unit.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select AUX3 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

signals input at the AUX 3 input jack on the front

panel.

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

• Select DOCK ANALOG to adjust the level of audio

signals input at the DOCK terminal of this unit

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only).

Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Initial setting: –3.0 dB

■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename)

Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD

and the front panel display. Press an input selector button

(e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change

the name for and perform the following procedure.

1 Press / to place the _ (underscore) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

The _ (underscore) flashes.

2 Press / to select the desired character.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press to change the character in the following

order or press to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,

+, etc.

3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input.

4 Press ENTER to exit.

The new names are registered, and the display returns

to the previous screen.

■ HDMI SET (HDMI settings)

Use to change the HDMI audio/video output/input to

match the connected component.

Choices: SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio),

VIDEO INFO (Video information),

HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)

DVD -> DVD

[ ]/[ ]:Position

[ ]/[ ]:Character

[ENTER]:Return

D)INPUT RENAME

ENTER

E)HDMI SET

a)SUPPORT AUDIO

b)VIDEO INFO

c)HDMI CONTROL

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

82 En

MANUAL SETUP

SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio)

Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on

this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the

HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

Choices: YSP-3000, OTHER

• This setting is effective when HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF

(see right).

• When HDMI CONTROL is set to ON, this setting is ineffective.

This unit follows the settings of the HDMI control-compatible

TV.

• The HDMI video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks of

this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.

VIDEO INFO (Video information)

Use to display the video information of the current input

signal.

Choices: HDMI RES., HDMI ERROR

• Select HDMI RES. to display the resolution of the

HDMI input/output signals.

• Select HDMI ERROR to display the error message for

HDMI sources or devices connected

(see page 104 for details).

HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)

Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI control-

compatible TV via HDMI. You can turn on or off the

power, select the input mode, and adjust the volume level

of this unit using the remote control supplied with your

HDMI control-compatible TV. For details, see “Using the

HDMI control feature” on page 71.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select ON to enable the HDMI control. The signals

input at the HDMI IN jacks are output at the HDMI

OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode.

• Select OFF to disable the HDMI control. The signals

input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI

OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode.

■ XM ANTENNA LEVEL (XM antenna level)

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use to display the current reception level of the XM

Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient the

connected XM Mini-Tuner Dock to obtain a value of 60%

or more.

Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%

“NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not

connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections

(see page 5 in the Reference Guide).

Notes

YSP-3000 OTHER

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

a)SUPPORT AUDIO

HDMI RES.;;;;1080P

HDMI ERROR;;;----

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Return

b)VIDEO INFO

Note

OFF ON XXXXXXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

c)HDMI CONTROL

XM ANTENNA LEVEL;;;;97%

[ENTER]:Return

F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL

83 En

MANUAL SETUP

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to

the display.

SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU

■ F.DISPLAY SET

(Front panel display settings)

Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the

front panel display.

STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display

when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on

the front panel or on the remote control.

Choices: –2, –1, OFF

AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)

If no operation is performed for a specified period of time,

the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness

of the front panel display in this case.

Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD

DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the

STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF

SCROLL (Front panel display scroll)

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Use to select the mode to display information in the front

panel display when operating your iPod or XM Satellite

Radio.

Choices: CONT., ONCE

• Select CONT. to continue to scroll the display.

• Select ONCE to scroll the display to the end once, after

which the first 15 characters appear and stay.

■ OSD SET (OSD settings)

Use to adjust the display position and to set the display

time of the OSD.

OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust

toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the

OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it.

Choices: –5 to +5

Initial setting: 0

OSD DISPLAY TIME (OSD display time)

(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)

Use to set the interval for which the OSD screen is

displayed after an operation.

Choices: ON, 10s, 30s

• Select ON to show the OSD screen constantly.

• Select 10s to turn off the OSD screen 10 seconds after

an operation.

• Select 30s to turn off the OSD screen 30 seconds after

an operation.

The OSD display time setting is available for your iPod and XM

Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). For details, see

pages 4 and 10 in the Reference Guide.

■ UNIT SET (Unit settings)

Use this to change the display unit of measurement.

Choices: METERS (Australia, Europe, Asia, and Korea

models), FEET (U.S.A. and Canada models)

• Select METERS to enter distances in meters.

• Select FEET to enter distances in feet.

If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may

change.

DISPLAY MENU

A)F.DISPLAY SET

B)OSD SET

C)UNIT SET

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[ENTER]:Enter

4)DISPLAY MENU

STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF

AUTO DIMMER

;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF

SCROLL;;;;;;;;;;;;CONT.

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

A)F.DISPLAY SET

Note

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0

OSD DISPLAY TIME;;;ON

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel

[ENTER]:Return

B)OSD SET

METERS FEET

[ ]/[ ]:Select

[ENTER]:Return

C)UNIT SET

Adjusting the audio balance

84 En

You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back

in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience.

You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from

each channel to manually balance the channel levels.

Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level

of each channel is identical when heard from your

listening position.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press TEST.

“TEST FRONT L” appears in the front panel display

and a test tone is output from the front left channel.

3 Press / to select the channel you want

to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows:

“TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer

is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS

OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 78).

4 Press / to adjust the channel volume.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

Adjusting the audio balance

Using the test tone

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

CODE SET

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

TEST

TEST FRONT L

Note

ENTER

TEST FRONT L

TEST CENTER

TEST FRONT R

TEST SUR.R

TEST SUR.L

TEST SUBWOOFER

ENTER

85 En

Adjusting the audio balance

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press TEST when you have completed all

your adjustments.

• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5-

channel stereo playback (see page 60), My Beam (see page 61),

or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.

• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 55).

• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and

60).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”

appears in the front panel display.

You can also manually adjust the channel levels while

playing back an input source such as a DVD.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press

CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel

you want to adjust.

The front panel display changes as follows.

“SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to

this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND

MENU (see page 78).

Notes

Using the audio output being

played back

TEST

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

CODE SET

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Note

YSP

TV/AV

CH LEVEL

ENTER

CH LEVEL

FRONT L +1.0dB

CENTER -2.5dB

FRONT R +1.0dB

SUR.R +2.0dB

SUR.L +2.0dB

SWFR --dB

86 En

Adjusting the audio balance

3 Press / to adjust the channel volume.

Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this

unit when you have completed your

adjustment.

• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5-

channel stereo playback (see page 60), or My Surround (see

page 55) is selected as the beam mode.

• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is

selected as the beam mode (see page 55).

• Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as

the beam mode (see page 61).

• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the

settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or

stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and

60).

If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

ENTER

Selecting the input mode

87 En

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions

of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, AUX1, and AUX2.

We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases.

1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

2 Press one of the input selector buttons to

select the desired input source.

3 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle

between input modes.

ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and

AUX2.

•AUTO

Automatically selects audio input signals in the following

priority order:

1) HDMI

2) Digital

3) Analog

Use this input mode in most cases.

•DTS

Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS.

Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater

stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS.

• ANALOG

Selects only analog signals.

Even when both digital and analog signals are input

simultaneously, only analog signals are selected.

You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the

power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in

INPUT MENU (see page 80).

Selecting the input mode

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

DOCK

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

YSP

TV/AV

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

Note

TV/STB AUTO

TV/STB DTS

TV/STB ANALOG

DVD AUTO

DVD DTS

AUX1 AUTO

AUX1 DTS

AUX1 ANALOG

INPUTMODE

When TV or STB is selected

as the input source

When DVD is selected

as the input source

When AUX1 is selected

as the input source

AUX2 AUTO

AUX2 DTS

When AUX2 is selected

as the input source

Adjusting the system parameters

88 En

This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to

adjust and customize the way this unit operates.

When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 93), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON

on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters.

Follow the procedure below to enter the system

parameters.

1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

turn off the power of this unit.

2 Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and

press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

turn on the power of this unit.

“MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front

panel display.

3 Release INPUT on the front panel.

Adjusting the system parameters

Note

Using the system parameters

STANDBY/ON

VOLUME

INPUT

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

ENTER

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

STANDBY/ON

INPUT

STANDBY/ON

MEMORY PROTECT

INPUT

89 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

You can protect the settings you saved in the system

memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or

unwantedly changed.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is

displayed in the front panel display and

press ENTER.

4 Press / to switch between “PROTECT:

ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”.

• Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection

feature.

• Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection

feature.

5 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Setting the MEMORY PROTECT

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MEMORY PROTECT

ENTER

PROTECT: ON

PROTECT: OFF

STANDBY/ON

90 En

Adjusting the system parameters

You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit

will not output sound beyond the limited volume level.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

“

3 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the maximum volume

level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

You can set the initial volume level when the power of this

unit is turned on.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

Setting the MAX VOLUME

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

MAX VOLUME SET

ENTER

Setting the TURN ON VOLUME

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

YSP

TV/AV

91 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level.

Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF

Control step: 1

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting for the maximum volume level will

be activated when you turn on the power of this unit

next time.

You can test the sound beam output from this unit to

experience the sound beam.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

TURN ON VOLUME

ENTER

STANDBY/ON

Setting the DEMO MODE

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

DEMO MODE

ENTER

92 En

Adjusting the system parameters

5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON”

and “DEMO: OFF”.

• Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode.

• Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the

sound beam.

The sound beam being output shuttles between left

and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling.

You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you

adjust the system parameters.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “PANEL INPUT KEY” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

DEMO: ON

DEMO: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

PANEL INPUT KEY

ENTER

93 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON”

and “P.INPUT: OFF”.

• Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on

the front panel.

• Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on

the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically

set to “ON”.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can disable the front panel keys except when you

adjust the system parameters.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

P.INPUT: ON

P.INPUT: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Disabling the front panel keys

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

F.PANEL KEY

ENTER

94 En

Adjusting the system parameters

5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL:

ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”.

• Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel

keys.

• Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel

keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the

factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the

parameters in SET MENU.

After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO

SETUP again to match your surround sound environment.

1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system

parameters” on page 88.

2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is

displayed in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.

ENTER

F.PANEL: ON

F.PANEL: OFF

STANDBY/ON

Setting the FACTORY PRESET

Note

YSP

TV/AV

ENTER

FACTORY PRESET

ENTER

95 En

Adjusting the system parameters

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

5 Press / to switch between “PRESET:

RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”.

• Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current

settings.

• Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting

procedure.

6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to

set this unit to the standby mode.

The new setting will be activated when you turn on

the power of this unit next time.

ENTER

PRESET: RESET

PRESET:CANCEL

STANDBY/ON

Remote control features

96 En

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other

manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control

codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area.

Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if

a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, STB, and TV).

For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer

to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set a remote control code

for.

The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains

lit.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the

remote control code while holding down

CODE SET.

3 Refer to “Controlling other components” on

page 97 to operate the external component

using the remote control.

If the external component functions correctly the

remote control code setup is successful.

If the external component does not function correctly,

the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm

that the remote control code is correct. See “List of

remote control codes” at the end of this manual and

start over from step 1.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

Remote control features

Note

Setting remote control codes

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

CODE SET

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

DOCK

+10

789

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Transmission indicator

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

Note

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries and reset the remote control codes.

When changing the batteries, be careful not to press

any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will

clear the contents of the memory.

SPORTS

MY SUR.

SPORTS

Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

97 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Operating your TV

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and

press TV to select TV as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the TV

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Selects a TV channel for playback.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available TV channels.

3 TV INPUT

Switches the input source for your TV.

4 TV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your TV.

5 TV INPUT1

Selects the input source of your TV.

6 TV VOL +/–

Adjusts the audio output level of your TV.

7 TV MUTE

Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV.

Controlling other components

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

98 En

Remote control features

■ Operating your DVD player/recorder

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press DVD to select DVD as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER

Use to select DVD menu items.

3 Operation buttons for DVD players

Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop.

4 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder.

5 MENU

Displays the DVD menu.

6 RETURN

Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit

from the DVD menu.

■ Operating your STB

(CATV/Satellite tuner)

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press STB to select STB as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the STB

operation mode.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available STB channels.

3 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your STB.

DVD

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

STB

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

789

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

99 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Operating your VCR

Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and

press AUX1 to select VCR as the input source.

The control area of the remote control changes to the

AUX1 operation mode.

This operation is available when your VCR is connected to the

AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.

1 Numeric buttons

Enter numeric digits.

2 CH +/–

Switches between the available VCR channels.

3 Operation buttons for VCR

Operate your VCR, such as play and stop.

4 AV POWER

Turns on or off the power of your VCR.

AUX1

YSP

TV/AV

STEREO

MY BEAM MY SUR.

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

CAT/

A-E

ENTRY

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

100 En

Remote control features

The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a

series of operations with the press of a single button. For

example, when you want to play a DVD, you would

normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input

source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV

macro feature lets you perform all of these operations

simply by pressing the DVD macro button.

• Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before

setting macros.

• The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the

tuning capability.

• If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than

the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled.

• If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting

procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from

step 1.

■ Setting macros for the TV with the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select

the TV channel.

Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen.

4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting.

Using the TV macro

Notes

STEREO MY SUR.

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

YSP

TV/AV

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

TV MUTE

CODE SET

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

While holding

down, press

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

STEREO

OFF

789

+10

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

MY SUR.

MY BEAM

MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS

TV INPUT

ENTER

101 En

Remote control features

ADVANCED

OPERATION

English

■ Setting macros for the TV without the

tuning capability

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to set macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press INPUT1.

Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1

screen.

4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen

changes to the display of the input source

selected in step 1.

5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

■ Operating macros

Press and hold one of the input selector buttons

for approximately two seconds to select the input

source you want to operate macros for.

The TV input changes at the same time the input mode

changes.

■ Canceling the macros

1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of

the input selector buttons to select the input

source you want to cancel the macros for.

Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.

2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE

SET.

3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros.

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

INPUT1

TV INPUT

ENTER

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

While holding

down, press

AUX2AUX1DVD

STB

TV MUTE

CODE SET

MACRO

While holding

down, press

ENTER

Troubleshooting

102 En

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and

contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ General

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit fails to turn on

when STANDBY/ON is

pressed, or enters the

standby mode soon after the

power has been turned on.

The AC power supply cable is not firmly

connected to the AC wall outlet.

Connect the AC power supply cable firmly

to the AC wall outlet.

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect

the AC power supply cable, plug it back in

after 30 seconds, and use it normally.

—

This unit suddenly enters the

standby mode.

The internal temperature becomes too high

and the overheat protection circuitry has

been activated.

Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool

down and turn it back on.

—

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source

again.

—

No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with

INPUT or the input selector buttons.

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume

audio output and adjust the volume level.

The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such

as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of

sampling frequency) are being received

from the source component.

Play a source whose signals can be

reproduced by this unit.

—

Change the system settings of the source

component.

—

The HDMI components connected to this

unit do not support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

Connect the HDMI components that support

the HDCP copy protection standards.

SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and

HDMI audio signals are not being played

back on this unit.

Set SUPPORT AUDIO to YSP-3000 in

MANUAL SETUP

The sound suddenly goes

off.

The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source

again.

—

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume

audio output and adjust the volume level.

No sound from the effect

channels.

You are playing back the source or program

in the 2-channel stereo playback or My

Beam mode.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the

remote control to select a multi-channel

playback mode and play back the source or

program once more.

No sound from the center

channel.

The output level of the center channel is set

to minimum.

Raise the level of the center channel.

No sound from the surround

channels.

The output level of the surround channels is

set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround

channels.

103 En

Troubleshooting

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

No sound from the

subwoofer.

BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to

FRONT.

Select SWFR.

The source does not contain low bass signals.

Distorted or too little bass

sound.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set

incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

One of the night listening enhancers is

currently selected.

Turn off the night listening enhancers.

Too much bass sound. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass.

The volume level of the subwoofer is too high.

Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer.

—

Surround sound effects are

insubstantial.

The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular

shaped room.

—

There is no wall in the path of the sound

beam.

Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in

the path of the sound beam.

—

Dolby Digital or DTS sources

cannot be played back.

(Dolby Digital or DTS

indicator does not light up in

the front panel display.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the

operating instructions for your component.

—

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO.

There is noise interference

when a subwoofer is not

connected to this unit.

The protection circuitry was in operation

because a source with strong bass elements

was played back.

Turn down the volume level.

Select SWFR for BASS OUT.

Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for

SUBWOOFER SET.

Low-frequency sounds are

distorted.

CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set

incorrectly.

Set CROSS OVER correctly.

On-screen display does not

appear.

The OSD video pin cable is not connected

properly.

Connect the cable properly.

This unit does not operate

properly.

The internal microcomputer has been frozen

by an external electric shock (such as

lightning or excessive static electricity) or

by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power supply cable from

the outlet and plug it in again after about 30

seconds.

—

No sound is heard from the

TV connected via HDMI.

The TV does not accept the multi-channel

audio signals.

Convert the multi-channel audio signals to

the 2-channel audio signals at the source

component such as a DVD player.

—

“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “YSP-3000”. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “OTHER”.

There is noise interference

from digital or high-

frequency equipment.

This unit is too close to the digital or high-

frequency equipment.

Move this unit farther away from such

equipment.

—

This unit does not output

effect sounds properly.

The original source includes surround effects.

Disable the surround effect settings of this unit.

—

My Beam auto-adjust

function does not work.

The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible.

—

Try manual-adjust function.

The sound reflectivity of the listening room

is too much.

Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO.

The remote control may be operated outside

of the remote control operation range.

The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 45 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

The function does not work properly

because of the condition of the connected

components.

Select My Beam and then try again.

104 En

Troubleshooting

■ Remote control

■ HDMI

■ FM tuner

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

The remote control does not

work and/or function

properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 45 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter

type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the

remote control sensor of this unit.

Reposition this unit.

—

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.

Cannot operate external

components with the remote

control of this unit.

The external component you want to operate

is not selected as the input source.

Press INPUT on the front panel or the input

selector buttons on the remote control to

select the external component you want to

operate.

The remote control code was not correctly

set.

Set the remote control code correctly or try

another code for the same manufacturer

using the “List of remote control codes” at

the end of this manual.

Even if the remote control code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

Use the remote control supplied with the

external component.

—

The cursor buttons do not

work during SET MENU

operation.

The operation mode selector was

unwantedly set to TV/AV.

Set the operation mode selector to YSP.

—

Cannot use the My Beam

auto-adjust function.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a

maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more

than 45 degrees off-axis from the front

panel.

Error message Cause Remedy

See

page

Device Error The number of the connected HDMI

components exceeds the limit.

Reduce the number of the connected HDMI

components.

—

HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI

components support the HDCP copy

protection standards.

—

Problem Cause Remedy

See

page

FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts

may cause this problem when the

transmitter is too far away or the antenna

input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

There is distortion, and clear

reception cannot be obtained

even with a good FM

antenna.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multi-path interference.

—

The desired station cannot

be tuned into with the

automatic tuning method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.

—

Use the manual tuning method.

Previously preset stations

can no longer be tuned into.

This unit has been disconnected for a long

period.

Preset the stations again.

Glossary

105 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel).

By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with excitement and realism

previously unheard of.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

■ Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for

2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

■ Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

■ DTS Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a

home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of

sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital

surround in your home. This system produces practically

distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right,

and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE

0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).

The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-

channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel

to existing 5.1-channel format.

■ DTS Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available: Music mode for playing music

sources and Cinema mode for movies.

■ EUPHONY

Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction

system implemented with state-of-the-art sound

technologies developed under the basic concept of

enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound

optimized without depending on the number of input

channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers)

or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady

center localization. It also can reproduce the surround

sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-of-

head” localization so that the listener feels an expanded

sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a

movie for long time.

■ HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first

industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video

interface. Providing an interface between any source (such

as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video

monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports

standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as

multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI

transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-

channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to

accommodate future enhancements and requirements.

When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure

audio/video interface that meets the security requirements

of content providers and system operators. For further

information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

Glossary

106 En

Glossary

■ LFE 0.1-channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low-frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

■ Neural Surround

Neural Surround

™

represents the latest advancement in

surround technology and has been adopted by XM

Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround

recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural

Surround

™

employs psychoacoustic frequency domain

processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound

stage with superior channel separation and localization of

audio elements.

■ PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted

without using any compression. This is used as a method

of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses

a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code

modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

■ SRS TruBass

SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement

technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and

headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave

below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver.

SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a

spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer low-

range audio data when presented with higher-frequency

harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the

original low-range sound that the speaker system is

incapable of producing.

Index

107 En

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

English

■ Numerics

3 Beam............................................................................ 55

5 Beam............................................................................ 54

■ A

AC power supply cable...................................................29

Audio pin cable...............................................................20

AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 35

■ B

Battery.............................................................................30

BEAM MENU................................................................ 74

Beam mode .........................................................54, 60, 61

■ C

Cable clamp ....................................................................20

Cardboard microphone stand.......................................... 37

CINEMA DSP ................................................................ 64

■ D

DEMO MODE................................................................91

Demonstration DVD......................................................... 6

Digital audio pin cable....................................................20

DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 83

Dolby Digital ..................................................................56

Dolby Pro Logic..............................................................56

Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 56

DTS.................................................................................56

DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 56

Dynamic range................................................................79

■ E

EUPHONY ...................................................................105

■ F

FACTORY PRESET ....................................................... 94

Fastener...........................................................................18

Front panel........................................................................7

Front panel display ...........................................................8

■ H

HDMI.............................................................................. 20

HDMI cable ....................................................................20

■ I

IntelliBeam ..................................................................... 35

IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 36

■ L

LFE 0.1-channel ........................................................... 106

■ M

MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................72

MEMORY.......................................................................42

Movie program................................................................64

Music program ................................................................64

My Beam.........................................................................61

■ N

Night listening enhancer .................................................67

■ O

On-screen display (OSD)................................................32

Optical cable ...................................................................20

OSD video pin cable .......................................................20

■ P

PCM ..............................................................................106

Power...............................................................................31

■ R

Rear panel .........................................................................9

Remote control................................................................10

Remote control code .......................................................96

Remote control sensor.....................................................30

■ S

SET MENU.....................................................................32

Sleep timer ......................................................................68

Sound field program........................................................63

Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................55

Surround mode................................................................56

Surround sound ...............................................................54

SOUND MENU ..............................................................78

Sports program................................................................64

Stereo sound....................................................................60

System parameter............................................................88

■ T

Test tone ..........................................................................84

TruBass............................................................................79

TV macro ......................................................................100

TV volume equal mode...................................................67

■ V

Volume ............................................................................47

Volume mode ..................................................................67

Index

Specifications

108 En

AMP SECTION

• Maximum Output Power (JEITA)

................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 21

20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2

SPEAKER SECTION

•Driver

Small dia. speakers

...................... 4 cm (1-9/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 21

Woofers

.................... 10 cm (3-15/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2

Frequency response ............................................. 60 Hz to 20 kHz

(-10 dB, stereo mode)

CONNECTIONS

• Input Jacks

TV/STB, AUX 1 AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ........... 2 pairs (Analog)

TV/STB, AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ........ 2 (Optical digital)

DVD, AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ............2 (Coaxial digital)

AUX 1, DVD HDMI IN ............................................................... 2

AUX 3 .......................................................................................... 1

• Output Jacks

SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ......1 (Subwoofer)

VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................1 (OSD)

HDMI OUT .................................................................................. 1

• System Connector Jack

INTELLIBEAM MIC ..................................1 (Microphone input)

FM SECTION

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Asia model] ............................. 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

GENERAL

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .................................. AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] .................... AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[Korea model] ....................................... AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

[General model] .................................... AC 110

–120 V, 50/60 Hz

[Asia model] ..........................................AC 220

–240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption ..................................................................32 W

• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.5 W or less

• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 800 × 155 × 152 mm

(31-1/2 x 6-3/32 x 5-31/32 in)

• Weight .............................................................. 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz)

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specifications

HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard:

• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)

licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.

List of remote control codes

ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216

AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284

AKAI 295, 296

ALBA

296

AOC 297

BELL &

HOWELL 292

BESTAR 298

BLAUPUNKT 229, 222

BLUE SKY 298

BRANDT 223

BROC SONIC 297

BUSH 296

BYD:SIGN 201, 202

CLATRONIC 298

CRAIG 224

CROSLEX 225, 298

CURTIS MATHIS

297, 226

DAEWOO 297, 298, 224,

227, 228

DAYTRON 239

DUAL 298

DWIN 293, 281

EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232

FURGUSON 223, 265, 266

FIRST LINE 298

FISHER 295, 233

FRABA 298

FUJITSU 289

FUNAI 277, 278

GE 293, 297, 234,

235, 236

GOODMANS 296, 298, 223

GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249

HITACHI 297, 239, 242,

243, 285, 206

ICE 296

IRRADIO 296

ITT/NOKIA 244, 245

JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237

JVC 296, 246, 247, 286

KENDO 298

KTV 297, 239

LG/GOLDSTAR

297, 298, 239, 237

LOEWE 298, 248, 207

LXI 293, 297, 225,

226, 233, 298

MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298

MARANTZ 298, 210

MATSUI 295

MEDION 203, 204, 298

MEMOREX 297, 216

MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287

NAD 226, 255

NEC 297, 252, 282

NOKIA 244, 245

NOKIA OCEANIC

245

NORDMENDE 265, 266

ONWA 296

PANASONIC 234, 235, 236,

253, 288, 211

PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298

PHILIPS 298, 225, 205

PIONEER 226, 235, 254,

255, 268

PORTLAND 297, 256

PROSCAN 293, 221

PROSCAN 231, 241, 251

PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270

QUASAR 234, 235

RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297

RCA 293, 297, 234,

256, 257, 258, 221

RUNCO 220, 230, 271

SABA 223, 269, 265, 266

SAMPO 281, 297, 280

SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248,

262, 275

SANYO 295, 233, 279,

272, 273, 274, 212

SCHNEIDER 296

SCOTT 297

SHARP 292, 239, 232,

213, 208

SIEMENS 229

SIGNATURE 216

SIGNATURE 292

SONY 263, 214

SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298

SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219

TELEFUNKUN269, 264, 265, 266

THOMSON 223, 266

TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215

VIDECH 297, 242

WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216

YAMAHA 299, 292, 242,

285, 287, 253, 206

YAMAJI 298

ZENITH 216, 261, 271

DVD PLAYER

AIWA 648, 649

APEX DIGITAL

652, 653, 654

BYD:SIGN 678, 679

DAEWOO 655

DENON 623, 624, 682

FUNAI 625

HARMAN/KARDON

656, 657

HITACHI 626, 688, 689

JVC 627, 643, 692

KENWOOD 628

KLH 658

LG/GOLDSTAR

645, 663, 664

MARANTZ 699, 659

MITSUBISHI 629

ONKYO 632, 633, 634

PANASONIC 623, 635, 668,

672, 682, 683, 684

PHILIPS 699, 647, 659

PIONEER 636, 637, 638,

673, 674, 675, 685

686, 687

RCA 639

SAMSUNG 642

SHARP 643, 692

SONY 644, 676, 677

SYLVANIA 662

SYMPHONIC 662

THOMSON 646

TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667

YAMAHA 699, 622, 623,

647, 682

ZERITH 663, 664

VCR

ADMIRAL 395

AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329

AKAI 322, 323, 324

AUDIO DYNAMIC

392, 394

BELL & HOWELL

393

BLAUPUNKT 325, 326

BROC SONIC 327

BUSH 322

CANON 325, 328

CGM 396, 332

CITIZEN 396

CRAIG 396, 363

CURTHIS MATHIS

397, 328, 333

DAEWOO 328, 334, 335

DBX 392, 394

DIMENSIA 333

DYNATECH 397

EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397

FISHER 393, 336

FUNAI 397

GE 328, 333, 387

GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341,

351, 363

GOODMANS 334, 337

GRUNDIG 332, 338

HITACHI 325, 333, 349,

342, 343

INSTANT REPLAY

325, 328

ITT/NOKIA 393

JC PENNY 392, 393, 394,

328, 333, 349,

396, 363

JVC 392, 394, 344,

345, 346, 347

KENDO 396

KENWOOD 392, 394, 396

LG/GOLDSTAR

396, 388

LOEWE 396, 337

LUXOR 395

LXI 393, 396, 397,

336, 349

MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328

MARANTZ 392, 394

MARTA 396

MATSUI 396

MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397

MINOLTA 333, 349

MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348,

359, 353, 352

MTC 363, 397

MULTITECH 397, 348, 354

NEC 392, 394, 344, 383

NOKIA 393, 395

NOKIA OCEANIC

395

OKANO 323

OLYMPIC 325, 328

ORION 327

PANASONIC 325, 328, 339,

355, 378, 384,

385, 386

PENTAX 333, 349

PHILCO 325, 328, 397

PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328,

337, 356, 357

PHONOLA 337

PILOT 396

PIONEER 325

QUASAR 325, 328

RCA/PROSCAN

325, 326, 328,

333, 335, 349,

358, 363, 397

REALISTIC 393, 397, 328,

336, 359, 362,

396, 363

SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363,

364, 365, 366

SANSUI 394

SANYO 393, 336, 367

SCHNEIDER 337

SCOTT 399, 335, 336,

348, 359, 354,

358, 352

SELECO 322

SHARP 395, 362, 382

SIEMENS 393

SIGNATURE 2000

395, 397

SONY 368, 379, 372,

373, 374, 375

SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328

SYMPHONIC 397

TANDBERG 334

TANDY 397

TASHIRO 396

TATUNG 392, 394

TEAC 392, 394, 397

TECHNICS 325, 328

TEKNIKA 396

TELEFUNKUN

376, 377

THOMAS 397

THORN 393, 396

TOSHIBA 335, 389

TOTEVISION 363, 396

UNITECH 363

UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376

VIDEOSONIC 363

W.WHOUSE 396

WARDS 395, 396, 336,

362, 397, 363

YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394

ZERITH 344, 361, 368,

371, 379, 396, 397

CABLE TV TUNER

ABC 739, 752, 753,

755, 758, 759, 762

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

722, 786, 787, 788

HAMIN 723, 724, 725,

726, 727

HITACHI 722

JEROLD 722, 728, 729,

732, 733, 734,

735, 736, 737

MAGNAVOX 738

MOTOROLA 748, 728

OAK 739, 742, 743

PANASONIC 744, 745, 746,

747, 783, 784

PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765,

766, 767, 768

PIONEER 748, 785, 747

RADIO SHACK749

RCA 744, 792, 793

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA

752, 753, 754, 789

SONY 756, 757

TOCOM 755

UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773,

774, 775

VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776,

777, 778, 779, 782

SATELLITE TUNER

ECHOSTAR 822

GE 837, 838, 839

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

823

HITACHI 824

HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846

JVC 822

MAGNAVOX 825

PANASONIC 826, 829

PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844,

845, 846, 847,

848, 849

PRIMESTAR 827

PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842

RADIO SHACK

828

RCA 837, 838, 839, 842

SAMSUNG 852

SKY+ 853

SKY HD 853

SONY 832, 835

TOSHIBA 833, 836

UNIDEN 825

ZENITH 834

YSP-3000

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WK75380-2

YSP-3000

Digital Sound Projector

OWNER’S MANUAL

00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:45 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

YSP-3000

Digital Sound Projector

Reference Guide for iPod

/XM Radio

This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and

operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the

supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this

unit, refer to the owner’s manual.

The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only.

“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

Neural Surround

™

name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation.

Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2

Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2

Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................................... 5

Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock............................................................................................. 5

Activating XM™ Satellite Radio.............................................................................................................. 6

Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations .................................................................................................... 6

Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels.......................................................................................... 9

Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information.................................................................................. 10

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 11

Overview

Contents

iPod

USING IPOD™

2 En

This unit has the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as

YDS-10, sold separately). Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, and use the supplied remote control to

operate your iPod.

• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.

• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.

• The photos and video clips stored on your iPod are not displayed on your TV monitor.

Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK

terminal of this unit using a dedicated cable.

Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power

until all connections between components are complete.

When your iPod and external component using the AUX 3 input

jack are connected to this unit at the same time, and when the

DOCK indicator is lit in the front panel display, iPod output takes

priority.

1 Navigate through the iPod menu ( / / / ) and

starts playback (ENTER).

2 Displays the OSD (on-screen menu) menu.

3 Selects AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or

AUX3 (Australia model) as the input source.

4 Use to return to the previous iPod menu.

5 Sets the operation mode of this unit.

6 Use to return to the previous iPod menu.

7 Stops playback.

8 Pauses playback.

9 Searches forward/backward.

0 Starts playback.

Skips to the beginning of the current/previous/next track.

8 and 9 toggle between play and pause operations in the Simple

Remote mode.

Using iPod™

Notes

Connection

CAUTION

OUT

SUBWOOFER

TV/STB

AUX 1

VIDEO

DOCK

AUDIO INPUTANTENNA

Yamaha iPod universal dock

(such as YDS-10, sold separately)

Rear panel of this unit

Controlling iPod™

ENHANCER

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

CH LEVEL TEST

TV INPUT TV MUTE

ENTER

SUR. DECODE

OFF

CODE SET

+10

YSP

TV/AV

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

RETURNDISPLAY

MACRO

INPUT1

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Using iPod™

3 En

English

• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in

“Troubleshooting” on page 11.

• While your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, your iPod battery is

automatically charged as long as this unit is turned on.

■ Controlling iPod in the Simple Remote

mode

You can perform some basic operations such as play,

pause, stop, backward/forward search, and track skip

using the remote control without the aid of the OSD. Such

basic operations can be performed also on your iPod.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada

models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set

your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock.

In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears

and the DOCK indicator lights up.

Use # and * on the remote control interchangeably to toggle

between play and pause operations.

Information on the current song appears only in the iPod screen

but not in the front panel display of this unit.

■ Controlling iPod in the Menu Browse

mode

You can perform the advanced operations using the remote

control with the aid of the OSD (see the owner’s manual

for information on the OSD). In the OSD, you can browse

the song list stored on your iPod. Further, you can change

or adjust the settings on your iPod as desired. Such

advanced operations cannot be performed on your iPod.

1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.

2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada

models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set

your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock.

In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears

and the DOCK indicator lights up.

3 Press DISPLAY, and display the menu

browse mode.

The OSD appears on your TV.

Note

YSP

TV/AV

iPod connected

Lights up

YSP

TV/AV

iPod connected

Lights up

DISPLAY

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Genres

Composers

Settings

iPod Top

01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 3 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Using iPod™

4 En

4 Press / and / to navigate through

the iPod menu, and press ENTER to start

playback of the selected song.

Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums

(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),

Composers (composers), Settings (settings)

• Playlists > Songs

• Artists > Albums > Songs

• Albums > Songs

• Songs

• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs

• Composers > Albums > Songs

• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat

Settings parameters:

Shuffle Shuffle

Use this function for random playback of songs or albums.

When “Songs” or “Albums” is chosen, “S” appears in the

top right corner while the songs or albums are being

shuffled. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the

choices.

Choices: Off, Songs, Albums

• Select “Off” to deactivate this function.

• Select “Songs” for random playback of songs.

• Select “Albums” for random playback of albums.

Repeat Repeat

Use this function for repeated playback of a song or a

sequence of songs. When “One” or “All” is chosen, “R”

appears in the top right corner while a song or a sequence

of songs are being repeated. Press ENTER repeatedly to

toggle between the choices.

Choices: Off, One, All

• Select “Off” to deactivate this function.

• Select “One” for repeated playback of a song.

• Select “All” for repeated playback of a sequence of

songs.

• Press RETURN or MENU to go back to the previous menu.

• The information on the current song also appears in the front

panel display. You can set the front panel display mode: CONT.

or ONCE. For details, see “SCROLL” (Front panel display

scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in

the owner’s manual (see page 83).

• You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed

after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display

time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (see

page 83).

• The YAMAHA logo appears in the iPod screen in this mode.

• Undisplayable characters are shown as underscores “_” in the

front panel display and OSD.

• You can change or adjust the “Settings” parameters only in the

OSD.

■ An example of the information display

during playback

1 Track number/total tracks

2 Name of the artist

3 Name of the album

4 Name of the song

5 Progress bar

6 Elapsed time

7 Shuffle and repeat icons

8 (playback), (pausing),

(search forward),

and (search backward)

9 Remaining time

ENTER

and

Notes

iPod[Play] S R

1/9



||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;

0:51-7:44

FrankieZipper

Made-to-order

RoadtoIndia

XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. AND CANADA MODELS ONLY)

5 En

English

■ About XM Satellite Radio

XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk, and

entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip

hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its

passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much

more.

This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio

broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. See “Surround modes and recommended sources” in the

owner’s manual (see page 56).

The XM Satellite Radio service is unavailable in Alaska and Hawaii.

Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold

separately by XM Satellite Radio) to the XM jack on the

rear panel of this unit. For information on your XM Mini-

Tuner and Home Dock, see the operating instructions

provided with XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.

• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,

the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a south-

facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can

mount it indoors or outdoors.

• Use the “XM ANTENNA LEVEL” parameter in “MANUAL

SETUP” (see page 82 in the owner’s manual) to display the XM

Satellite Radio reception level (%) in the OSD. For the best

reception, adjust the orientation of the connected indoor

antenna of the Home Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more.

If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

Home Dock may not be connected properly to the XM jack on the

rear panel of this unit.

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

XM READY

Legal Disclaimer

Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply.

Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with

an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian

residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US

residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents)

Note

Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock

DIGITAL INPUT

TV/STB

DVD

IR INXMAUX1

AUX 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock

(each sold separately)

Rear panel of this unit

Note

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

6 En

Once you have installed XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,

inserted XM Mini-Tuner, connected Home Dock to your

XM READY home audio system, and installed the

antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving

XM programming. There are three places to find your

eight-character XM Radio ID: on XM Mini-Tuner, on XM

Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see “All

Channel Search mode” on page 7). Record the XM Radio

ID in the following eight squares for reference.

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”, or “F”.

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at

http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-

2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal

from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation

normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods

you may need to keep your XM READY home audio system on

for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on

your XM READY home audio system, you are done. For more

information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at

http://www.xmradio.ca/ or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-

GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).

1 Set the operation mode selector to

TV/AV.

2 Press FM/XM repeatedly to select XM as the

input source.

In the front panel display, the XM indicator lights up

and the XM Satellite Radio information (channel

number/channel name, channel category, and artist

name/song or program title) for the currently selected

channel appears.

• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to

select XM as the input source.

• When XM is selected as the input source, this unit

automatically recalls the previously chosen channel.

Activating XM™ Satellite Radio

Note

Basic XM™ Satellite Radio

operations

STEREO

MY BEAM

PRESET/TUNE

MEMORYSEARCH

SLEEP

INPUTMODE

ENHANCER MENU

RETURNDISPLAY

TV VOL

VOLUME

ENTER

SUR. DECODEOFF

SPORTS

5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM

MY SUR.

MUSIC MOVIE

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

CATFM/XM

MACRO

INPUT1

ENTRY

CAT/

A-E

321

AUX1 AUX2

STB

DVD

AUX3

POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON

DOCK

+10

789

TV/AV

YSP

TV/AV

[001] Preview

Lights up

FM/XM

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

7 En

English

3 Search for a desired channel by using one of

the four XM Satellite Radio search modes:

• To select a channel from all channels, see “All

Channel Search mode” on this page.

• To select a channel by channel category, see

“Category Search mode” on this page.

• To select a channel from the preset channels, see

“Preset Search mode” on page 8.

• To select a channel by directly entering the channel

number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on

page 8.

• You can preset the XM Satellite Radio channels (see page 9).

• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front

panel display and/or in the OSD (see page 10).

■ All Channel Search mode

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “ALL CH

SEARCH”.

2 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search

for an XM channel within all channels.

• Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search.

• To change the channel category, press CAT/A-E ( / ).

• Select channel “0” to display your XM Radio ID number.

■ Category Search mode

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “CAT

SEARCH”.

2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change

the XM channel category.

3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search

for an XM channel within the selected

channel category.

Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search.

ALL CH SEARCH

ENTER

ENTRY

CAT SEARCH

ENTER

CAT/

A-E

ENTER

ENTRY

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

8 En

■ Preset Search mode

Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search

mode, you must preset the XM channels. For details, see

“Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels” on page 9.

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select

“PRESET SEARCH”.

2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change

the preset channel group (A to E).

3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to

change the preset channel number (1 to 8).

You can also use the numeric buttons to directly input the preset

channel number.

■ Direct Number Access mode

1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select either

“ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.

2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter

the desired three-digit XM channel number.

For example, to enter the number 123, press the

numeric buttons 1, 2, and 3.

The front panel display changes as follows:

• To enter a one- or two-digit number, press the corresponding

number button(s), and press ENTER to confirm the number. If

you do not press ENTER, this unit automatically confirms the

entered number after a few seconds.

• If you press a button other than the numeric buttons and

ENTER during this operation, the Direct Number Access mode

is canceled.

PRESET SEARCH

ENTER

CAT/

A-E

ENTER

ENTRY

Notes

ALL CH SEARCH

CAT SEARCH

5BEAM

ST+3BEAM

3BEAM

<XM> --1

<XM> -12

<XM> 123

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

9 En

English

You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite

Radio channels (A1 to E8: 5 preset channel groups with 8

preset channel numbers each). You can then recall the

preset channels easily by selecting the preset group and

number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 8.

1 Search for an XM channel that you want to

preset.

See “Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations” on

page 6 for details.

The initial factory setting for all preset channels is “[001]

Preview”.

2 Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel

display for about 10 seconds.

Operate steps 3 to 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.

3 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a

preset group while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The selected preset group appears in the front panel

display.

4 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to select

a preset number while the MEMORY indicator

is flashing.

The selected preset number appears in the front panel

display.

5 Press MEMORY or ENTER to assign the

preset group and number to the selected XM

channel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

A colon (:) appears, and the MEMORY indicator

turns off in the front panel display.

When you overwrite an existing preset channel, the previously

stored XM channel information is cleared and updated.

Presetting the XM™ Satellite

Radio channels

Note

[043] XMU

Currently selected channel number

Flashes

MEMORY

Currently selected preset group

Flashing

ENTER

CAT/

A-E

C [043] XMU

Note

C8 [043] XMU

Currently selected preset number

Flashing

ENTER

ENTRY

Colon (:)

MEMORY

ENTER

C8: [043] XMU

Colon (:)

XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

10 En

You can display the XM Satellite Radio information

(channel number/channel name, channel category, and

artist name/song or program title) for the currently

selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.

If a status or error message appears in the front panel display or in

the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada

models only)” in “Troubleshooting” on page 11.

■ Displaying the XM channel information

in the front panel display

Press DISPLAY repeatedly to toggle between the

following information displays.

When the channel number / channel name is

displayed:

When the channel category is displayed:

When the artist name / song title is displayed:

• You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE.

When ONCE is selected, the front panel display scrolls

characters to the end once, after which the first 15 characters

appear and stay. See “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in

“F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s

manual (page 83).

• Undisplayable characters are displayed as spaces.

■ Displaying the XM channel information

in the OSD

Press DISPLAY.

The following screen is displayed in the OSD.

• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.

• You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed

after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display

time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual

(page 83).

• To hold the XM Satellite Radio OSD information, press

ENTER. To unhold, press ENTER again.

• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio OSD

information screens for future reference. To view the previous

OSD screens, press RETURN repeatedly while the current XM

Satellite Radio OSD information screen is on hold.

Displaying the XM™ Satellite

Radio information

Note

Channel number / Channel name

Artist name / Song or program title

DISPLAY

Channel category

[043] XMU

<CAT>ROCK

Coldplay / Spee

XM INFORMATION

ALL CH SEARCH

XM :043

CHAN :XMU

CAT :Rock

NAME :Coldplay

TITLE:Speed of sound

.(Coldplay/Spe)

[ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL

[ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY

DISPLAY

TROUBLESHOOTING

11 En

English

Refer to the following charts when the status messages appear during your iPod or XM Satellite Radio operations on this

unit. If you experience a problem that is not listed below, or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the

standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

■ iPod

In case of a transmission error with no status message appearing in the front panel display and in the OSD, check the connection

between your iPod and this unit.

■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Troubleshooting

Note

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

This unit is in the middle of recognizing

the connection with your iPod.

This unit is in the middle of acquiring the

song lists from your iPod.

Connect error

There is a problem with the signal path

from your iPod to this unit.

Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod

universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.

Try resetting your iPod. —

Unknown iPod

Your iPod is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod

mini are supported.

—

iPod connected

The connection between your iPod and

this unit is completed.

Disconnected

Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha

iPod universal dock.

Set your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal

dock.

Unable to play

This unit cannot play back the files stored

on your iPod.

Check the playability of the files stored on your iPod. —

Store other playable music files on your iPod. —

Status message Cause Remedy

See

page

CHECK ANTENNA

XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not

connected to the XM jack of this unit or

not working properly.

Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections

and adjust the orientation for the best reception level.

UPDATING

The XM user encryption code is being

updated.

Wait until the encryption code is updated. —

NO SIGNAL

The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the indoor antenna of Home

Dock for the best reception level.

It takes longer than four seconds to decode

audio or text data.

Wait until the decoding process is finished. —

OFF AIR

The currently selected XM channel is not

broadcasting signals.

Check the channel number again or select another

XM channel.

—

<XM> - - -

The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer

available.

- - - / - - -

No artist name or song title is available.

<CAT> - - -

No channel is available for the selected

category.

Select another channel category by pressing

CAT/A-E repeatedly.

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia

WK75460-2

01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 12 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.

Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC

wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual.

YSP-3000

QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

Printed in Malaysia WK75520 [En]

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

AUX 1

TV/STB

SUBWOOFER

AUX 1

DVD

AUX 2

VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

ANALOG AUDIO

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

AUDIO OUTPUT

DVD player

Decide where to install this unit.

Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired

surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.

YSP-3000

Connecting external components to this unit

Installing this unit

This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the

surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit using a rack, etc.

Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before

installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you

install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit.

For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual.

Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is

measured from the left and right corners.

Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the

adjacent walls.

40˚ to 50˚

An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture

To the AC wall

outlet

132

Pull out the cap

before connecting

the optical cable,

and then check the

direction to insert the

cable.

Do not plug the power

supply cable into an AC

wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

Items used for connections and operations

in this guide

Audio pin cable (x1)

OSD* video pin cable (x1)

Optical cable (x1)

Digital audio pin cable (x1)

IntelliBeam microphone (x1)

Cardboard microphone stand (x1)

Demonstration DVD (x1)

*OSD: On-Screen Display

Connection

example 1

1. Pull out the cap

2. Check the direction

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

Front left channel

Center channel

Front right channel

Surround left channel

Surround right channel

This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to

this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the

analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video

connection between your DVD player and TV.

VIDEO

INPUT

HDMI

INPUT

HDMI

OUTPUT

HDMI

OUT

DVD

AUX 1

AUDIO INPUT

OUT

AUX 1

TV/STB

SUBWOOFER

AUX 1

DVD

AUX 2

VIDEO

DIGITAL INPUT

COAXIAL

To the AC wall

outlet

Connect cables in the following order.

3 Install this unit in the

rack.

1 Place this unit in front of

the rack.

This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can

enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have

a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite

tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections

using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual.

Connection

example 2

DVD player

YSP-3000

Do not plug the power

supply cable into an AC

wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

If you have connected external components,

follow the steps on the backside to start the

AUTO SETUP procedure.

Continued

on the back

Supplied Sold separately

Connect cables in the following order.

1 OSD video pin cable

(Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)

2 HDMI cable

(Displays the DVD digital video on the TV)

3 HDMI cable

(Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit)

2 (Sold separately) 3 (Sold separately)

2 Place this unit upside

down and connect this unit

to your TV and DVD player.

y Hint

•To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.

•You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions

supplied with the metal wall bracket.

Note

Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack.

Video connection

Supplied

1 Audio pin cable

(Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit)

2 OSD video pin cable

(Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)

3 Optical cable

(Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit)

4 Digital audio pin cable

(Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit)

* The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily.

They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.

4 Installation is completed.

The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of

cloth on the floor in step 2.

* The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily.

They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.

Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/

Digital airwave tuner

Audio connection

HDMI connection

Subwoofer

Optical cable

Note

Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD

player is turned on.

y Hint

If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV

(except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote

control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power,

select the audio output component, and adjust the volume

level of this unit.

Note

Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD

player is turned on.

0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 7/26/07, 4:06 PM1

Press ENTER to start the AUTO

SETUP procedure, and then

leave the room within 10 seconds.

The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room

within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure

starts.

The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO

SETUP procedure.

When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the

following screen appears on the TV.

If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page

40 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again.

y Hint

• The result may differ depending on the environment.

• If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears

on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO

SETUP” on page 41 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow

the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once

again, press RETURN.

Press ENTER.

The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and

then the menu screen disappears from the TV.

Disconnect the IntelliBeam

microphone.

The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam

microphone in a safe place.

The settings are automatically saved in the system memory.

Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound.

For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component.

Enjoying surround sound

Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your

listening environment

The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output

during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress.

Press STANDBY/ON on the

remote control.

The power of this unit turns on.

Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control

(see page 30 in the Owner’s Manual).

If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit.

If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and

crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the hint on page

36 in the Owner’s Manual.

Check the digital signal being output at this unit.

The input channel indicators (see page 8 in the Owner’s Manual) are lit in the front panel display, and they switch

according to the channel composition of the corresponding input source. If the sound is output from your TV

speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 46 in the Owner’s

Manual.

Press VOLUME +/

on the remote control to adjust the volume

level of this unit.

Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control

to select the desired beam mode.

Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit.

For further information on the beam modes, see page 54 in the Owner’s Manual.

To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions,

sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 in the Owner’s Manual.

AUTO SETUP START

Will begin in 20sec

Please leave the room

**--------

[RETURN]:Cancel

Enjoying TV in surround sound

SHOW RESULT

MEASUREMENT COMPLETE

BEAM MODE :5BEAM

SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE

[ENTER]:Save set-up

[RETURN]:Do not save set-up

AUTO SETUP COMPLETE

Please remove the MIC from

the YSP and the listening

position.

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

ENTRY

A-E

ENHANCER

DISPLAY RETURN

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

ENTRY

A-E

ENHANCER

DISPLAY RETURN

Select the TV channel using the

remote control supplied with

your TV.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

Press TV on the remote control

of this unit.

This unit switches to the TV playback mode.

More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft)

Within 1 m

(3.3 ft)

IntelliBeam

microphone

Cardboard

microphone

stand

Listening

position

Place the IntelliBeam microphone on

the extended center line of this unit

and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from

it. Also, make sure place the

IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m

(3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center

height of this unit.

IntelliBeam

microphone

Center line

Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)

INTELLIBEAM MIC

1234

Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position.

Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would

be when you are seated.

IntelliBeam microphone (supplied)

Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC

jack on the front panel.

You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam

microphone on top of it as shown below.

MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE

VOLUME CH TV VOL

Enjoying DVDs in surround sound

Select the DVD video input on

your TV.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

1) Press DVD on the remote

control of this unit.

This unit switches to the DVD playback mode.

Play back the supplied demonstration

DVD on the DVD player.

Set the operation mode selector

to YSP.

This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.

Press and hold AUTO SETUP for

more than 2 seconds.

The menu screen appears on the TV.

If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video

pin cable (see the connection example on the front page).

Check the following points.

About the IntelliBeam microphone

• Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn

from this unit?

• Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower

from the center height of this unit?

• Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the

front of this unit?

About the room environment

• Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible?

Prepare to leave the room.

The best setting may not be done if you are in the room.

Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing

ENTER in step 10.

y Hint

• When leaving the room, bring this guide with you.

• Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure.

• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.

• To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started,

press RETURN.

Turn on the power of your TV.

Select the appropriate video

input on your TV.

“YSP-3000” appears on your TV. If the OSD video pin cable

is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the

connection example, switch the video input to “1”.

Within 1 m

(3.3 ft)

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

ENTRY

A-E

ENHANCER

DISPLAY RETURN

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION & CHECK

Please connect the MIC.

Please place the MIC at least

1.8m/6ft away from the YSP

unit. The MIC should be set

at ear level when seated.

After [ENTER] is pressed,

please leave the room.

[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel

Measurement takes about 3min.

231

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

SLEEP

5BEAM 3BEAMST+3BEAM

A-E

PRESET/TUNE

SEARCH MEMORY

INTELLIBEAM MIC

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

A-E

DISPLAY RETURN

TV/AV

YSP

ENTER

A-E

DISPLAY RETURN

AUX1 AUX2 AUX3

DVD

STB

INPUT1

PRESET/TUNE

SEARCH MEMORY

MACRO

231

VOL MODE

AUTO

SETUP

INPUTMODE

SLEEP

5BEAM 3BEAMST+3BEAM

STB

INPUT1

A-E

PRESET/TUNE

SEARCH MEMORY

MACRO

231

5BEAM

STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR.

3BEAMST+3BEAM

Cardboard

microphone stand

Upper bound

position of the

microphone

Lower bound position

of the microphone

AUX1 AUX2 AUX3

DVD

POWER POWERSTANDBY/ON

INPUT1 MACRO

VOLUME

MIN MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN MAX

Subwoofer

Center height of

this unit

Continued from the front

Cardboard microphone stand (supplied)

Input channel indicators

0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 7/26/07, 4:06 PM2

Transcripción de documentos

00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 2, 2007 11:19 AM UA YSP-3000 YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WK75380 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. ■ Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cable or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. i En IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: 2. IMPORTANT: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. ii En CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating this unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. WARNING THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION. 2 This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. 19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. 20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. iii En CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Contents Overview ................................................................. 2 Features .................................................................. 3 Using this manual .................................................. 5 Supplied accessories .............................................. 6 Controls and functions .......................................... 7 Enjoying surround sound ....................................54 5 Beam .................................................................... 54 Stereo plus 3 Beam ................................................. 55 3 Beam .................................................................... 55 My Surround ........................................................... 55 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...... 57 Enjoying TV in surround sound ............................. 58 Adjusting surround mode parameters ..................... 59 Enjoying stereo sound ..........................................60 PREPARATION 2-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60 5-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60 Installation ............................................................ 16 Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) ..............61 Before installing this unit ........................................ 16 Installing this unit ................................................... 16 Using auto-adjust function ...................................... 61 Using manual-adjust function ................................. 62 Connections .......................................................... 19 Using sound field programs .................................63 Getting started ..................................................... 30 Using SET MENU ................................................ 32 Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................ 32 The flow chart of SET MENU ................................ 33 Changing OSD language ..................................... 34 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) .............................. 35 Using the system memory ................................... 42 Convenient usage of the system memory ............... 42 Saving settings ........................................................ 42 Loading settings ...................................................... 43 BASIC OPERATION Playback ............................................................... 45 FM tuning ............................................................. 48 FM controls and functions ...................................... 48 Automatic tuning .................................................... 49 Adjusting the audio balance ................................84 Using the test tone .................................................. 84 Using the audio output being played back .............. 85 Selecting the input mode ......................................87 Adjusting the system parameters .......................88 Using the system parameters .................................. 88 Setting the MEMORY PROTECT ......................... 89 Setting the MAX VOLUME ................................... 90 Setting the TURN ON VOLUME .......................... 90 Setting the DEMO MODE ..................................... 91 Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY ........................... 92 Disabling the front panel keys ................................ 93 Setting the FACTORY PRESET ............................ 94 Remote control features .......................................96 Setting remote control codes .................................. 96 Controlling other components ................................ 97 Using the TV macro ............................................. 100 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting ..................................................102 Glossary ...............................................................105 Index ....................................................................107 Specifications ......................................................108 List of remote control codes ...........................................i 1 En English Selecting the input source ....................................... 45 Playing back sources ............................................... 46 Adjusting the volume .............................................. 47 Using MANUAL SETUP ....................................... 73 BEAM MENU ........................................................ 74 SOUND MENU ...................................................... 78 INPUT MENU ........................................................ 80 DISPLAY MENU ................................................... 83 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ........................... 35 Installing the IntelliBeam microphone ................... 36 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ....................... 37 MANUAL SETUP ................................................72 ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control ................ 30 Operation range of the remote control .................... 30 Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode ................................................ 31 ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION SETUP CINEMA DSP programs ........................................ 64 Using the music enhancer ....................................66 Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) 67 Using the sleep timer ............................................68 Displaying the input source information ............70 Using the HDMI control feature .........................71 SETUP Before connecting components ............................... 20 Connections using HDMI cables ............................ 21 Connecting a TV ..................................................... 22 Connecting a DVD player/recorder ........................ 23 Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner ............................................................................. 24 Connecting a digital airwave tuner ......................... 25 Connecting a portable audio player ........................ 26 Connecting other external components .................. 27 Connecting a subwoofer ......................................... 28 Connecting the FM antenna .................................... 29 About the IR IN terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ...................... 29 Connecting the AC power supply cable ................. 29 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 7 Front panel display ................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................. 9 Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) ..... 10 Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) ......... 13 Manual tuning ......................................................... 49 Automatic preset tuning .......................................... 50 Manual preset tuning .............................................. 51 Selecting a preset station ........................................ 52 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) ........................................... 52 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Overview Overview It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of surround sound experience as your local movie theater. Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound. This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for from its built-in 2 woofers and 21 full-range small speakers. You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions. The YSP-3000 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room. Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector. Imaginary front right speaker R C SR L SL Imaginary surround right speaker Imaginary front left speaker Imaginary center speaker Listening position Imaginary surround left speaker 2 En Features Features My Surround In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area. My Surround is a function integrated and optimized with DiMAGIC’s Euphony technology and Yamaha’s Beam reproduction system. My Beam This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle manually or automatically using the supplied remote control to the maximum of 45°, rightward and leftward. Cinema DSP This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the original dramatic sound impact. HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP ◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components ◆ Functional link with an HDMI control-compatible TV Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit. In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro capability that enables a series of operations with the press of a single button. ◆ Dolby Digital This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ DTS This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth playback, resulting in a surround sound experience. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic II This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs 2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic. ◆ DTS Neo:6 This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema mode are available to play back music and movie sources respectively. ◆ Music Enhancer to restore the original depth and width of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format. ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A and Canada models only) Sophisticated FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) XM™ Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the XM MiniTuner Dock, and Antenna sold separately by XM Satellite Radio) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience ◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability iPod™ Controlling Capability (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini ◆ Playback information displaying capability ◆ Battery charging capability 3 En English AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. Compatibility with the Newest Technologies This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS Neo:6, Music Enhancer, and Neural Surround. INTRODUCTION Digital Sound Projector™ The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, and My Surround), 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback, and My Beam. Features The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks of 1 Ltd. TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ™ “DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 4 En is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd. Using this manual Using this manual 1 Install this unit in your listening room. See “Installation” on page 16. 2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components. See “Connections” on page 19. 3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit. See “Getting started” on page 30. 4 Run AUTO SETUP. See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35. 5 Play back a source. See “Playback” on page 45. 6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings. See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54. INTRODUCTION Notes • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for each component. • Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments English 7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 and “Remote control features” on page 96. 5 En Supplied accessories Supplied accessories Check that you have received all of the following parts. Remote control (×1) STANDBY/ON Fasteners (×4) Optical cable (×1) POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER Digital audio pin cable (×1) 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY ENTER YSP DISPLAY (Orange) MENU TV/AV CAT/ A-E Cable clamp (×1) 3BEAM IntelliBeam microphone (×1) RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST Audio pin cable (×1) TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET Cardboard microphone stand (×1) (White/Red) REFERENCE GUIDE (iPod/XM Radio) (×1) (U.S.A. and Canada models) UA YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Reference Guide for iPod/XM Radio Overview Batteries (×2) (AA, R6, UM-3) This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this unit, refer to the owner’s manual. y The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only. Indoor FM antenna (×1) iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Contents Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2 Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2 Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2 XM Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)........................................................ 5 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ................................................................................................. 5 Activating XM Satellite Radio .................................................................................................................. 6 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations ........................................................................................................ 6 Presetting the XM Satellite Radio channels .............................................................................................. 9 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...................................................................................... 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 11 (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Demonstration DVD (×1) QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE OSD* video pin cable (×1) Items used for connections and operations in this guide 2 Connecting external components to this unit s Audio pin cable (x1) s OSD* video pin cable (x1) s Optical cable (x1) YSP-3000 s Digital audio pin cable (x1) s IntelliBeam microphone (x1) Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual. s Cardboard microphone stand (x1) s Demonstration DVD (x1) QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE *OSD: On-Screen Display This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to Connection example 1 1 Installing this unit This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual. TV DVD player TV Decide where to install this unit. DVD player Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. VIDEO INPUT Pull out the cap before connecting OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 R COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT 2. Check the direction HDMI INPUT HDMI OUTPUT HDMI connection 1 2 the optical cable, and then check the Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/ Digital airwave tuner Optical cable 1. Pull out the cap Video connection Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. Connection example 2 this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and TV. surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. direction to insert the cable. AUX 1 1 2 (Sold separately) 3 (Sold separately) 2 DVD IN An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture OUT (Yellow) Front left channel 40˚ to 50˚ Center channel 1 Front left channel 2 3 HDMI 4 Center channel AUDIO INPUT Front right channel Front right channel Surround left channel Surround left channel Surround right channel Surround right channel OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD YSP-3000 COAXIAL To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB OUT AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO AUX 2 SUBWOOFER AUX 1 Do not plug the power Audio connection DVD Install this unit using a rack, etc. TV/STB TV/STB Do not plug the power the rack. 2 Place this unit upside 3 Install this unit in the down and connect this unit to rack. your TV and DVD player. Audio connection 4 Installation is completed. supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit. For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual. 1 Place this unit in front of To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of cloth on the floor in step 2. YSP-3000 COAXIAL supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They Connect cables in the following order. are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. Supplied Connect cables in the following order. 1 Audio pin cable (Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit) Supplied 2 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 1 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 3 Optical cable (Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit) Sold separately 2 HDMI cable (Displays the DVD digital video on the TV) 3 HDMI cable (Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit) 4 Digital audio pin cable (Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit) *OSD: On-Screen Display y Hint y Hint y Hint • To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. • You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions supplied with the metal wall bracket. Note Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. Continued on the back • If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. • Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued AUTO SETUP procedure. on the back Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack. Printed in Malaysia WK75520 [En] C2007 All rights reserved. * The number of provided languages varies depending on the sales area. 6 En Controls and functions Controls and functions INTRODUCTION Front panel 3 1 2 AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC 4 5 INPUT 1 AUX 3 input jack Connect your portable audio player (see page 26). 2 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP (see page 36). 3 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see page 45). Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see page 91). 7 6 VOLUME + STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME +/– Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see page 47). 7 STANDBY/ON Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 31). Notes • When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound reproducing. • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI signals. English 7 En Controls and functions Front panel display 2 1 890A B C 3 D 4 E 5 6 7 F 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at the HDMI IN jack(s). A NIGHT indicator Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is selected (see page 67). 2 TUNER indicators FM: Light up when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast. XM: MEMORY flashes during the XM preset operation (U.S.A. and Canada models only). B SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 68). 3 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program is selected (see page 64). 4 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 5 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder operates (see page 56). Note The neural decoder is available for the U.S.A. and Canada models only. C Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) Show the current Radio Data System status. D XM indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when XM is selected as the input source. E Multi-information display Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the parameters of this unit. F Input channel indicators Show information when you adjust the parameters of this unit. The channel component of the current digital input signal is displayed (see page 56). 6 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (see page 66). 7 Volume level indicator Displays the current volume level. 8 DOCK indicator (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Lights up when your iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, or iPod mini is connected to this unit via the DOCK terminal on this unit. 9 SRS TruBass indicator Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 79). 0 EQUAL indicator Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected (see page 67). 8 En y You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 83). Controls and functions Rear panel The illustration below shows the rear panel of the U.S.A. and Canada models. INTRODUCTION F ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD AUX 1 C DVD D COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 IN TV/STB XM IR IN OUT E HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 90 A B (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 ANTENNA jack Connect the FM antenna (see page 29). 2 DOCK terminal (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS10, sold separately) (see page 2 in the Reference Guide). 3 AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks Connect an external component via an analog connection (see page 23). 4 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an analog connection (see pages 22 and 24). 5 VIDEO OUT jack Connect to the video input jack of your TV to display the OSD of this unit (see page 22). 6 SUBWOOFER OUT jack Connect your subwoofer (see page 28). 7 AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect an external component via a coaxial digital connection (see page 27). A XM antenna jack (U.S.A and Canada models only) Connect your XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) (see page 5 in the Reference Guide). B IR IN terminal (U.S.A and Canada models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only (see page 29). C AUX 1 HDMI IN jack Connect your digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, or game console via an HDMI connection (see page 21). D DVD HDMI IN jack Connect your DVD player via an HDMI connection (see page 21). E HDMI OUT jack Connect to the HDMI IN jack on your HDMI component such as a TV or a projector connected to this unit (see page 21). F AC power supply cable Connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 29). English 8 AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect an external component via an optical digital connection (see page 27). 0 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection (see page 23). 9 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an optical digital connection (see pages 22 and 24). 9 En Controls and functions Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (S). y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 97 for details. 1 G STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 DVD AUX1 AV TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO *4 TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM 5 6 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 7 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 8 9 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP 0 DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH D E F Q R S t TV VOL U* *A *B *C H* I* J* K L M N O P MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET V* W* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, STB, TV, or FM). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67). 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35). 7 CINEMA DSP program buttons Select the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63). 8 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66). 9 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 0 DISPLAY Displays information on the selected input signal. A VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 47). B MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 47). C TV INPUT Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see page 97). D CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85). E TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 84). 10 En Controls and functions F DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99). U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97). H TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 97). V CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97). Sets up remote control codes (see page 96). J INPUT1 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97). Note K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 100). INTRODUCTION G My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61). T RETURN Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET MENU screen. The functions L and M are available only when the FM stations are preset. L a/5 Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52). M A-E Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52). N SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 68). O INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 87). P Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and 61). Q SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 37 and 73). S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. English 11 En Controls and functions This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control FM, Radio Data System, or iPod when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (7). Note that the Radio Data System controls are available for Europe model only, and the iPod controls are available for Australia model only. STANDBY/ON DVD AUX1 STB TV TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E 1 2 MEMORY FM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 ENTRY A-E ENTER 6 These functions are also available when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 3BEAM 4 DISPLAY Radio Data System and iPod: Displays information when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 9 MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN 4 VOLUME y +10 ENHANCER 3 5 SUR. DECODE OFF CH 2 Numeric buttons FM: Enter numbers. 3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52). Use A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the input above. POWER POWER AV 1 PRESET/TUNE FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52). 7 5 MEMORY FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51). y This function is also available when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52). TV VOL 6 SEARCH FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see page 49). 12 En MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 7 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. Controls and functions Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 97 for details. 1 G STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 AV DOCK AUX1 DVD *4 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT 0 MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 9 AUX3 TV STB 7 8 AUX2 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM 5 6 TV SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH E F Q R S t TV VOL U* *A *B *C D H* I* J* K L M N O P MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET V* W* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. INTRODUCTION This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (S). 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3/DOCK, STB, TV, or FM/XM). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67). 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35). 7 Sound field program buttons Select the sound field programs (see page 63). 8 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66). 9 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 0 DISPLAY Displays information on the selected input signal. A VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 47). B MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 47). C TV INPUT Toggles between the input source on your TV (see page 97). D CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85). E TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 84). English 13 En Controls and functions F DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99). G My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61). T RETURN Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET MENU screen. U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97). H TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 97). V CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97). Sets up remote control codes (see page 96). J INPUT1 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97). Note K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 100). L a/5 Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 52). M CAT Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 52). N SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 68). O INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 87). P Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and 61). Q SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 37 and 73). S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. 14 En The functions L and M are available only when the FM/XM stations are preset. Controls and functions STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM 1 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 2 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 CAT/ A-E 6 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY ENTER TV/AV RETURN 4 VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TEST TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET 2 Numeric buttons FM, XM: Enter numbers. 3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52). Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the input above. XM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to select XM channels in All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to select the preset channel number (1 to 8) in Preset Search mode. Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to select XM categories in All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to select the preset channel group (A to E) in Preset Search mode. Use ENTER to confirm the input above (see pages 7 and 8 in the Reference Guide). y MENU YSP DISPLAY CH LEVEL 5 3BEAM MUSIC ENHANCER 3 MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 PRESET/TUNE FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52). INTRODUCTION This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control FM, XM Satellite Radio, or iPod when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (7). 7 These functions are also available when this unit is playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 4 DISPLAY XM and iPod: Displays information when this unit is receiving an XM channel (see page 10 in the Reference Guide) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 5 MEMORY FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51). XM: Use to store the preset stations (see page 9 in the Reference Guide). 6 SEARCH FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see page 49). XM: Switches between search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search) (see pages 7 and 8 in the Reference Guide). 7 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. English 15 En Installation Installation This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which procedure should come first. Especially when you make a connection over HDMI, we recommend that you make a connection first before installation (see page 21). Before installing this unit This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be sufficient when this unit is installed in the following locations. • Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound beams • Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls • Rooms with measurements outside the following range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to 11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) • Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening position to this unit • Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to obstruct the path of sound beams • Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls • Rooms where the listening position is not in front of this unit y • You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see page 55) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position is not directly facing toward the front of this unit). • You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting 2-channel or 5channel stereo playback (see page 60) or My Beam (see page 61) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions. Notes • We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack, or a stand. • This unit weighs 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz). Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving this unit away from your TV. Installing this unit Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Parallel installation Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above or below this unit. An object, such as furniture Side view 5 cm (2 in) or more Corner installation Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the adjacent walls. 40° to 50° Front Rear An object, such as furniture 16 En Installation ■ Installation examples Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. PREPARATION Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible. English 17 En Installation ■ Using a metal wall bracket ■ Using a rack You can use the optional metal wall bracket to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room. You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a commercially available rack. Metal wall bracket When this unit is installed above your TV This unit TV YSP-3000 325 65 325 92 112 24- 7x22 65 When this unit is installed under your TV 4- 7 670 SPM-K30 (Option) (mm) y Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to attach this unit to the metal bracket. ■ Using a stand You can mount your TV on a stand placed on a commercially available rack and install this unit under your TV. Note Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit (see page 16) and that it is strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. ■ Affixing this unit Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this unit and the top of the rack, etc. This unit Stand TV Peel off 2 the film 1 Fasteners Notes This unit y Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on how to install the stand or how to mount and the TV on the stand. 18 En • Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may fall over and cause injury. • Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as a result. Connections Connections This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal: For audio input • 2 optical digital input jacks • 2 coaxial digital input jacks • 2 sets of analog input jacks • 1 universal dock terminal (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) For audio output • 1 subwoofer output jack For audio/video output • 1 HDMI output jack For video output • 1 analog output jack Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, portable audio player, game console, and iPod. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components to this unit, see pages 21 to 28. PREPARATION For audio/video input • 2 HDMI input jacks CAUTION • Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. • Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit. Audio connection Video connection TV This unit Subwoofer portable audio player Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner VCR or game console 19 En English DVD player Connections Before connecting components ■ Cables used for connections ■ Affixing cables To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position, and then affix cables in the cable clamp. Audio/Video A HDMI cable Optical cable Attach to this unit Audio Audio pin cable (supplied) (White) ■ Information on HDMI™ (White) Audio Signals (Red) (Red) Input source Audio signal type DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM DVD audio 2-channel stereo (up to 96 kHz/24 bit) Blu-ray Disc HD DVD Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM Optical cable (supplied) Digital audio pin cable (supplied) (Orange) (Orange) Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable y 5 • We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Subwoofer pin cable ■ Priority order for audio input signals Video OSD video pin cable (supplied) (Yellow) (Yellow) When multiple types of audio signals are simultaneously being input from a single source component, this unit plays back the audio signals in the following priority order: HDMI → Digital → Analog As default settings, the following input jacks are assigned to the corresponding input sources: Input jack ■ Notes on connecting the optical cable • Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable. When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put the cap back in place. • When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack, make sure the direction is correct. Input source TV/STB DVD AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 Cap 20 En HDMI Digital Analog Connections Connections using HDMI cables This unit is equipped with 2 HDMI input jacks and 1 HDMI output jack. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections, and you can skip the connection procedures from page 22 to 25. If your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner and an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Notes y We recommend that you secure the HDMI cable(s) with adhesive tape, etc. once you have connected the HDMI cable(s) to the HDMI jack(s) of this unit. Rear panel of this unit OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD PREPARATION • Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit. • When HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see page 82) and this unit is in the standby mode, the signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI OUT jack. AUX 1 COAXIAL DVD OPTICAL SUBWOOFER AUX 1 IN TV/STB * OUT HDMI A Video input Optical digital output HDMI input This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. A A HDMI output DVD player/recorder HDMI output Digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital airwave tuner, or game console TV Audio/Video A HDMI cable Video OSD video pin cable Audio English Optical cable 21 En Connections Connecting a TV For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Notes • If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks. • Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit. Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER R AUX 1 TV/STB XM L Analog audio output Video input Optical digital output TV Video OSD video pin cable Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable 22 En IR IN Connections Connecting a DVD player/recorder Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital audio connection. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Notes Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO PREPARATION • Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder. • If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see page 27). DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER DOCK * R AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN For the DVD/VCR combo player/recorder connection L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV Coaxial digital output DVD player/recorder Audio Audio pin cable Digital audio pin cable English 23 En Connections Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER R L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV * This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable 24 En AUX 1 Optical digital output Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner TV/STB XM IR IN Connections Connecting a digital airwave tuner Connect the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit in addition to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO PREPARATION ANTENNA DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER DOCK Connect to the analog audio output jacks on the TV. Video signal to the TV * AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN Optical digital output Digital airwave tuner This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable English 25 En Connections Connecting a portable audio player Connect the analog audio output jack on your portable audio player to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel of this unit. Front panel of this unit AUX 3 Analog audio output Portable audio player Audio 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable 26 En Connections Connecting other external components If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component (e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. If your component does not support optical digital connections, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your component to the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. If your component does not support any digital connections, connect the analog audio output jacks on your component (e.g., VCR) to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). If you make analog and digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT or AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks. Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO PREPARATION Note DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER DOCK R AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV Optical digital output Coaxial digital output DVD player/recorder, VCR, game console, CD player, etc. Audio English Audio pin cable Optical cable Digital audio pin cable 27 En Connections Connecting a subwoofer Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER OUT jack on this unit. This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 35) or select SWFR for BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 78). Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 5 Monaural input Subwoofer Audio 5 Subwoofer pin cable 28 En TV/STB XM IR IN Connections Connecting the FM antenna Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit. FM indoor antenna (supplied) Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD PREPARATION COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN About the IR IN terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only) The IR IN terminal does not support normal external component connection. This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) XM IR IN IR IN terminal Connecting the AC power supply cable Once all other connections are complete, plug the AC power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. To the AC wall outlet English 29 En GETTING STARTED Getting started Installing batteries in the remote control y Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control. Press Operation range of the remote control 1 Press and hold the mark on the battery cover and then open the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit during operation. Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 45 Close the battery cover. 45 Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the following cases: – The remote control is left without batteries for more than two minutes. – Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control. – The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed when you change batteries. • If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes again. 30 En Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps. • If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible. Getting started Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode 2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to the standby mode. Note When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on. INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 STB FM/XM SETUP TV INPUT1 MACRO TV PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. The volume level appears in the front panel display, and the current input source and beam mode are displayed. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control VOLUME 30 Current volume level MY SUR Current input source Current beam mode English DVD 31 En USING SET MENU Using SET MENU Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the comfort of your own home. 1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD of this unit. 2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. 3 Turn on the power of your TV. The following screen appears on your TV. YSP-3000 STANDBY/ON or Push [MENU] to begin set-up STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control OSD screen example If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control supplied with your TV to switch the video input until the OSD appears. 32 En Using SET MENU The flow chart of SET MENU The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure. Run LANGUAGE SETUP. See “Changing OSD language” on page 34. Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam). See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35. If an error occurs SETUP Look for a remedy. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of error messages and possible remedies. Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP. See “Playback” on page 45, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54, and “Using sound field programs” on page 63. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments Run MANUAL SETUP. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72. y • If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 74) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 75) in BEAM MENU. • If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams, adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 77). English 33 En CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE Changing OSD language This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / to select the desired language, and press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations while viewing information in the front panel display. 3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP, and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER ;LANGUAGE SETUP . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL ITALIANO NEDERLANDS 34 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically. Beam optimization: This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. Sound optimization: This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. The flow chart of AUTO SETUP This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize all or part of the parameters. Notes *1 Optimizing the beam angle Beam optimization *1 The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND OPTIMZ only is selected. *2 The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. *3 The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. SETUP Checking the environment of your listening room *2 *3 Checking the subwoofer and optimizing the beam delay, frequency, and volume Sound optimization English 35 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Installing the IntelliBeam microphone The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. • Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization. • An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room. To avoid the possibility of an error: – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the walls. • The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 72) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed. • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to CROSSOVER VOLUME HIGH CUT this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum. MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel 2 Remote control Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. 3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of the unit with the IntelliBeam microphone facing upward at your normal listening position. Note Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit. y You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. IntelliBeam microphone INTELLIBEAM MIC Cardboard microphone stand 36 En Within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Sofa AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and properly placed in your listening room, follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam optimization and sound optimization procedures. Center line IntelliBeam microphone ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand You will find three separate parts (one circular part and two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. VOLUME + STANDBY/ON SETUP 1 INPUT 2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 3 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME 9 SUR. DECODE OFF 1 3BEAM RETURN CH TV VOL (U.S.A. and Canada models) Insert one of the longitudinal part into the crevice of the other longitudinal part. 3 Place the circular part on top of the two combined longitudinal parts. 4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone on top of the circular part. English 2 37 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 3 Notes • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure. • To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before installing this unit” on page 16. In such cases, run MANUAL SETUP (see page 72) to manually adjust the corresponding parameters. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for appropriate remedies. SET MENU p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 1 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again. • You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. y • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP procedure is run successfully. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only. • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 43). Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. 4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of the subwoofer. STANDBY/ON ;AUTO SETUP or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control . 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ only 3)SOUND OPTIMZ only 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 38 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Check the following points once again before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. • Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to this unit? • Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper location? • Are there any large obstacles in between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room? 7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. The following screen appears on your TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds. Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. ENTER ENTER AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel ENTER BEAM OPTIMZ only (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about one minute. SETUP BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time. • If the unit has been relocated. • If your listening room has been restructured. • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged. This menu takes about three minutes. AUTO SETUP START Will begin in 10sec Please leave the room ← Flashes **-------[RETURN]:Cancel If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an error message is displayed. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again. SOUND OPTIMZ only (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit. • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about two minutes. Note English You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure. 39 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 8 Check that the following screen is displayed on your TV. The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are displayed on your TV. 9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press RETURN to cancel the results. The following screen is displayed for two seconds and then disappears from your TV. Example 1 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ← Flashes ENTER Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Example 2 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE ← Flashes If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41. Press ENTER to exit AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from step 3. ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED] BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :YES AUTO SETUP COMPLETE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Your YSP unit may not be set up correctly. We recommend you try again. Please press [ENTER] key to exit. y • If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP procedure again. For details, see step 9. • If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit, increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if “5 BEAM” is displayed as a result. 10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. y If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system memory” on page 42. 40 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts Error message ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. Cause The IntelliBeam microphone is not connected to this unit. Remedy Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit. See page 36 While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved. Error message Cause Remedy See page There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone was disconnected while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit. 36 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of YSP. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed in front of this unit. 36 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height of this unit. 36 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha service center for assistance. 36 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — SETUP ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. English 41 En USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY Using the system memory Convenient usage of the system memory 3 You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER When the curtains are closed When the curtains are open ;MEMORY . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE p 4 Saving settings 1 p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press / to select SAVE and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER ENTER YSP 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 42 En [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter p y . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2)MEMORY SAVE Using the system memory 5 Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Loading settings You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on page 42 according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2)MEMORY SAVE 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. MEMORY1 Save Now ? SET MENU Push [ENTER] to Save . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU Press ENTER again. The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. SETUP 6 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving ENTER 3 Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP ENTER ENTER 7 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ;MEMORY Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p MENU . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE English 43 En Using the system memory 4 Press / to select LOAD and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Press ENTER again. The new parameters saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. 1)MEMORY LOAD ENTER ENTER MEMORY1 Loading ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 SET MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 7 ENTER ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? Push [ENTER] to Load 44 En p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 5 Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. MENU PLAYBACK Playback Selecting the input source You can play back sound from the components connected to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons (TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3) on the remote control. The name of the selected input source and the type of corresponding input mode appear in the front panel display. ■ Front panel operations Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to toggle between TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, and AUX3. The name of the corresponding input source and the type of current input mode are displayed in the front panel display. ■ Remote control operations y In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/ AV to change the control area (see page 96). Press TV to play back a TV program. TV INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 AUTO TV/STB TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY Name of the selected input source Type of the selected input mode AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER DISPLAY STB SUR. DECODE OFF 0 Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast. BASIC OPERATION FM/XM MENU TV/AV YSP AUTO TV/STB RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Press DVD to play back a DVD. DVD DVD AUTO English 45 En Playback Press AUX1 (or AUX2) to play back a component connected to the AUX 1 (or AUX 2) jack on the rear panel of this unit. 2 Switch to the video input on your TV using the remote control supplied with the TV and display the DVD menu screen. AUX1 Note If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no sound is heard. AUX1 AUTO 3 DVD Press AUX3 to play back a component connected to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel. AUX3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source. 4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the supplied remote control. Audio signals from your DVD player are output from this unit. y AUX3 Playing back sources Once an input source is selected (see page 45), you can play back the selected input source. Note This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback source. y For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective owner’s manual. 1 Turn on the power of your DVD player. 46 En • You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital connection (optical/coaxial/HDMI). The input channel and LFE indicators light up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal input at the optical/coaxial/HDMI jack. If the PCM indicator lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream output, DTS output, and/or HDMI output of the DVD player. • If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit to around 45. • If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied with this unit to operate these components. For details on how to set remote control codes, see page 96. Playback ■ Muting the sound Adjusting the volume TV VOL VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 1 Press MUTE to mute the sound. “AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel display, and the volume level indicator flashes. MUTE INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE AUDIO MUTE ON Flashes Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the volume level. The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front panel display. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) DVD 2 or VOLUME Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound output. “AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the front panel display (or the numeric value of the current volume level appears if you press VOLUME +/–), and the volume level indicator lights up. + VOLUME BASIC OPERATION VOLUME 5BEAM MUTE or Front panel Remote control Lights up VOLUME 30 AUDIO MUTE OFF Notes • The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time. • One volume level increases or decreases each time you press VOLUME +/–. • You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if you press and hold VOLUME +/–. Note The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time. y You can select whether the sound output is to be muted completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 78). English 47 En FM TUNING FM tuning There are two tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signal is strong and there is no interference. If the radio signal is weak, tune into the FM station manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations in total (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). y • This section exceptionally uses the remote control for Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models. • When the operation mode selector is set to TV/AV, you can operate all FM functions. When the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can only operate the functions described in “Selecting a preset station” (see page 52). Note Orient the connected FM antenna for the best reception. FM controls and functions ■ Remote control functions Set the operation mode selector (8) to TV/AV before tuning or preset tuning. 1 FM Selects FM as the input source. This unit is tuned into the last selected FM station. y U.S.A. and Canada models use FM/XM. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER DVD AUX1 STB TV AV TV AUX2 AUX3 2 PRESET/TUNE Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see page 51). TV INPUT1 MACRO 1 2 3 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 6 7 4 ENTRY ( / ) • Selects the preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 52). • Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 49). 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY A-E ENTER MENU 4 TV/AV 5 YSP DISPLAY 3 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select the preset station numbers (see page 52). RETURN 8 5 A-E ( / ) Selects the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 51). y U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E VOLUME MUTE CH TV INPUT . TV VOL TV MUTE 6 MEMORY • Stores a preset station in the memory (see page 51). • Hold down this button for more than three seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 50). CODE SET (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) 7 SEARCH Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 49). 8 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. 48 En FM tuning Automatic tuning 4 Automatic tuning is effective when the radio station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. Press ENTRY ( / ) once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into an FM station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the station appears in the front panel display. • Press to tune into a higher frequency. • Press to tune into a lower frequency. TV/AV ENTRY YSP 2 ENTER Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM Manual tuning y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). 3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the desired FM station signal is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manual tuning automatically switches the tuner to the monaural reception mode to increase the signal quality. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 2 Lights up Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION SEARCH FM A FM 88.9 MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the colon (:) off. y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). English 49 En FM tuning 3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM SEARCH y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). A FM 88.9 MHz 3 No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press and hold MEMORY for more than three seconds. The preset station group and number, the MEMORY indicator, and the AUTO indicator flash. Automatic preset tuning starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. Press ENTRY ( / ) to tune into the desired station manually. MEMORY ENTRY Flashes ENTER A1:FM 88.9 MHz y Hold down the button for quick search. Automatic preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). You can recall the preset stations easily by selecting the preset station groups and numbers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 50 En Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Notes • When you overwrite an existing preset station, the previously stored FM station is cleared. • If the number of automatically preset stations does not reach 40 (E8), this unit automatically stops searching. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are preset automatically. If the desired station is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 51. FM tuning y Manual preset tuning • If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to display the colon. • U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E . • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT for U.S.A. and Canada models). You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each) manually. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. 5 TV/AV YSP Press ENTRY ( / ) to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. ENTRY 2 3 Tune into the desired FM station. See page 49 for tuning instructions. ENTER Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. Flashes MEMORY A1:FM 88.9 MHz Preset station number y 4 Press A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. 6 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display together with the station band and frequency. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION • You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired preset station number. • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset number by pressing / . Flashes MEMORY A-E ENTER Flashes A1:FM 88.9 MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. A :FM 88.9 MHz Notes • When you overwrite an existing preset station, the previously stored FM station is cleared. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 51 En English Preset Colon (:) station group FM tuning Selecting a preset station You can tune into the preset stations simply by selecting the preset station groups and numbers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. 4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display together with the station band and frequency. ENTRY TV/AV YSP 2 ENTER Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM A1:FM 88.9 MHz y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). 3 Press A-E ( / ) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A-E ENTER y • You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired preset station number. • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset number by pressing / . Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes y • If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to display the colon. • U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E . • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT for U.S.A. and Canada models). 52 En • You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired station manually (see page 49). • In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. FM tuning 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 50). Program type Descriptions NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sport EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pop music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R.M Middle-of-the-road music LIGHT M Light classical CLASSICS Serious classical OTHER M Other music Note The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station broadcasts the PS data. 2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. DISPLAY PS PTY RT CT Frequency display BASIC OPERATION • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program. • Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data System program. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Note In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). English 53 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying surround sound You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback. Notes • When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected. • To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that the parameters best match your listening environment. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER 5 Beam 3BEAM Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right, center, surround left, and surround right channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel format. MENU Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam. TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN 5BEAM (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Notes TV/AV YSP 2 Press one of the beam mode buttons (5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to select the desired beam mode for 5.1channel play back. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 MY SUR. 6 54 En • To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly off the walls in your listening room. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 74). Enjoying surround sound Stereo plus 3 Beam Outputs normal sound from the front left and right channels and sound beams from the center and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds can be heard close to the center of the listening position while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are sitting right in front of the stage. Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam. Notes • When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 74). My Surround ST+3BEAM 2 This mode enables surround system in a small listening area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on page 16). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam modes are unavailable. Press MY SUR. to select My Surround. MY SUR. 6 Note The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward the listening position. BASIC OPERATION 3 Beam Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. Because the listening position area is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams cannot be reflected off the wall. Notes • Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are ineffective in this mode. • For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must face toward the front of this unit. Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam. 3BEAM 3 English y You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 77). 55 En Enjoying surround sound ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected surround mode, the decoder indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Status When PCM signals are being input Indicator PCM When DTS digital signals are being input When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Digital signals are being input When Dolby Pro Logic is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected as the surround mode + DIGITAL PL PL • You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 87). • Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS or Dolby Digital. ■ Input channel indicators Depending on the channel component of the current digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: When 2-channel stereo signals are being input When 5.1-channel signals are being input 56 En Indicator Recommended source Surround mode Dolby Pro Logic – All sources Dolby Pro Logic II Movie Music Game Movies Music Games DTS Neo:6 Cinema Music Movies Music – XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround (U.S.A. and Canada models only) y Status ■ Surround modes and recommended sources Notes • When you select an input source (see page 45), the surround mode used for the previously selected input source is automatically selected. • If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround mode used for the previously selected input source before the power was turned off is automatically selected. • If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE. • The surround modes are available: – when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the 2channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 60) and My Surround (see page 55). – when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 65). – when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 64). In this case, only Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are available. – when 2-channel signals are being input. – when the Music Enhancer is turned off (see page 66). Enjoying surround sound Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the surround mode. 2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC, PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, neural surround Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema y The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 65) or when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 64). In addition, the beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 54), while the Music Enhancer must be also turned off (see page 66). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF SUR. DECODE 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY MENU Neo:6 Cinema TV/AV CAT/ A-E ENTER YSP DISPLAY Neo:6 Music RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) PRO LOGIC BASIC OPERATION PLII Movie 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. PLII Music TV/AV YSP PLII Game neural surround (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Example of the surround mode display in the front panel display when the CINEMA DSP program and the Music Enhancer are turned off English 57 En Enjoying surround sound Enjoying TV in surround sound 4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers, reduce the volume level of your TV until you can no longer hear any audio being output. To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote control supplied with your TV. 5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level. You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV in real surround sound. y Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below. TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY VOLUME AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL 6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back in multi-channels. For more information on surround modes, see page 56. SUR. DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Select the TV channel you want to watch. To select a TV channel, use the remote control supplied with your TV. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 3 Press TV. This unit outputs audio signals from your TV. TV 58 En Enjoying surround sound Adjusting surround mode parameters You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround sound effect. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF 0 SPORTS +10 ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 PANORAMA Gives the front left and right channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling. Choices: ON/OFF Default setting: OFF 9 SUR. DECODE ENHANCER ■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is selected Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound” on page 57 and select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music. DIMENSION Adjusts the difference in volume between the front and surround channels to the desired volume balance. Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to +3 (toward the front direction) Default setting: STD (standard) C. WIDTH Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is output only from the center channel. Control range: 0 to 7 Default setting: 3 ■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected 2 Press / to select the parameter. 3 BASIC OPERATION ENTER C. IMAGE Adjusts the center image from three channels (front left and right and center) to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center) Default setting: 0.3 Press / to configure the selected parameter. ENTER English 59 En ENJOYING STEREO SOUND Enjoying stereo sound You can enjoy 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control. Notes • When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam. • When the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56) and the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63) become ineffective. Note 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output from the center and surround channels. MENU TV/AV 5-channel stereo playback YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Sounds are output from front left and right, center, and surround left and right. This is ideal for playback in a large listening area or at a party. 2-channel stereo playback Sounds are output from the front right and left channels. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs, and can be used to replace your TV speakers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV 2 Press STEREO twice to select the 5-channel stereo playback as the beam mode. “5CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display. YSP STEREO 4 2 Press STEREO to select the 2-channel stereo playback as the beam mode. “STEREO” appears in the front panel display. STEREO 4 STEREO 60 En 5CH STEREO PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM) Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people while enjoying music or movies at night. My Beam microphone STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Note Using auto-adjust function The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be automatically adjusted. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two seconds. A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep pointing the remote control toward this unit while the test tones are being output so that the My Beam microphone can collect the test tones. Control range: L60° to R60° Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L45° to R45° Notes BASIC OPERATION If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63), and TruBass (see page 79) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display. • An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test tones are being output. • Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are being output. • Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control while the test tones are being output. • The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the batteries and then try the procedure again. • When the input signal with 64 kHz or 96 kHz of sampling frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be automatically adjusted. English MY BEAM 5 61 En Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) Using manual-adjust function You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing back an input source. This function is also ideal if the listening position is out of the operation guarantee range of the auto-adjust function. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press MY BEAM. “MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display. MY BEAM 5 3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to adjust the beam angle. Control range: L90° to R90° • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the left side. • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the right side. ENTER ANGLE 62 En 0 USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Using sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing) chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The Yamaha CINEMA DSP programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Note Choose a CINEMA DSP program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the CINEMA DSP program itself. ■ What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument is the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which the listener is sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections combined with the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one surface only (from the ceiling or the wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections, and subsequent reverberations all together help us determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create the sound fields. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. With the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you can create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the CINEMA DSP technology. English 63 En Using sound field programs CINEMA DSP programs You can select from three different CINEMA DSP programs (MUSIC, MOVIE, and SPORTS) depending on the type of source you want to enjoy. The CINEMA DSP indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the CINEMA DSP programs is selected. ■ Movie program Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Notes • The CINEMA DSP programs are ineffective when My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. • If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press one of the CINEMA DSP program buttons on the remote control. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF TV/AV YSP 2 3BEAM MOVIE 8 9 SUR. DECODE ■ Sports program +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back sports sources. This program densely concentrates the vocal sound of the commentator in the center while broadening the sound from the audience or the environment all around your listening room. 1 ■ Music program Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back music sources. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an actual rock or jazz concert hall. 1 Press MOVIE to select the movie CINEMA DSP program. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SPORTS to select the sports CINEMA DSP program. SPORTS TV/AV YSP 2 Press MUSIC to select the music CINEMA DSP program. MUSIC 7 64 En 9 Using sound field programs ■ Turning off CINEMA DSP programs Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy the original sound without the CINEMA DSP program effect. 2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE, or SPORTS to select the desired CINEMA DSP program. MUSIC 1 TV/AV YSP 2 7 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 3 MOVIE or 8 SPORTS or 9 Press / . “DSP LEVEL” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTRY Press OFF to turn off the CINEMA DSP programs. “CINEMA DSP OFF” is displayed in the front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator disappears. ENTER OFF 0 DSP LEVEL 0dB CINEMA DSP OFF 4 Press / to adjust the effect level of the selected CINEMA DSP program. You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the direct sound so that each CINEMA DSP program can reflect your listening environment and your preference even more accurately. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. BASIC OPERATION ■ Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels ENTER Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB • A larger value increases the effect level. • A smaller value decreases the effect level. TV/AV YSP English 65 En USING THE MUSIC ENHANCER Using the music enhancer You can use the Music Enhancer of this unit to improve the sound nearest to the original depth and width of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF SPORTS 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER 3 Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch between the Music Enhancer levels (OFF, MIN, and MAX). MENU ENHANCER TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL ENHANCER:HIGH (U.S.A. and Canada models) ENHANCER:LOW 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 ENHANCER OFF The ENHANCER indicator lights up when “ENHANCER:HIGH” or “ENHANCER:LOW” is selected. Press ENHANCER to select the Music Enhancer. The currently selected mode appears in the front panel display. Lights up ENHANCER Notes • The Music Enhancer is not compatible with the CINEMA DSP programs. If a CINEMA DSP program is selected while the Music Enhancer is on, the Music Enhancer is turned off automatically. In this case, the Music Enhancer remains off even after the CINEMA DSP program is canceled. Likewise, if the Music Enhancer is turned on while a CINEMA DSP program is selected, the CINEMA DSP program is canceled automatically. In this case, the CINEMA DSP program remains off even after the Music Enhancer is turned off. • The Music Enhancer is available only when a setting other than My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. 66 En USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE) Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.). The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 Lights up SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV programs. • Select OFF to turn off the volume mode. MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP Press / to adjust the effect level of compression while NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is displayed. Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL VOLUME, or OFF. ENTER BASIC OPERATION 2 3 VOL MODE Effect.Lvl:MIN NIGHT:CINEMA Effect.Lvl:MID NIGHT:MUSIC Effect.Lvl:MAX TV EQUAL VOLUME OFF The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected. • Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum compression. Notes Lights up 67 En English • The volume mode settings are canceled if you press STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from the AC wall outlet. • The volume mode settings become ineffective when My Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 55). USING THE SLEEP TIMER Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source. FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER CAT/ A-E SLEEP 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min SLEEP 30min SLEEP OFF MENU ENTER YSP RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 3 TV/AV YSP 2 120min TV/AV DISPLAY 1 SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval for the sleep timer. Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel display while switching the interval for the sleep timer. SLEEP Flashes 68 En Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. Lights up Using the sleep timer ■ Canceling the sleep timer 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP SLEEP 3 OFF Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated. Disappears BASIC OPERATION Note The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is stored in the system memory. y The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the AC power supply cable from the AC outlet. English 69 En DISPLAYING THE INPUT SOURCE INFORMATION Displaying the input source information You can display the format and sampling frequency of the current input signal in the front panel display. 7 8 OFF 2 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU Press DISPLAY. The information on the current input signal is displayed as follows: DISPLAY TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE D.DGTL:48kHz or (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP INPUT SIGNAL DOLBY DGTL:48kHz Input signal Indicator Dolby digital DOLBY DGTL DTS DTS PCM PCM Analog ANALOG Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48/64/ 88.2/96 kHz – y When the input signal is unclear, “___” is displayed for the sampling frequency. 70 En USING THE HDMI CONTROL FEATURE Using the HDMI control feature You can operate the following functions using the remote control supplied with your TV if this unit and an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) are connected via HDMI. • Turning on or off the power (synchronized operation with the TV) • Selecting the audio output component (TV or this unit) • Adjusting the volume level (up/down and mute) An example of the HDMI control-compatible component is a Panasonic EZ Sync (for U.S.A. and Canada) or Viera Link (for other countries)-compatible component (TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, etc.). y If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models). Connect this unit to your HDMI control-compatible TV via HDMI. For details about HDMI and HDMI components, see “Information on HDMI™” on page 20 and “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 21. Also in the owner’s manual supplied with your TV, refer to the information on connecting an AV amplifier. 2 Turn on the power of all components connected via HDMI. For details about controlling external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. 3 Check the system settings for all components connected via HDMI and activate the HDMI control feature. For details about setting external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. Once you have followed steps 1 to 3, you do not need to carry out the same procedure again next time. 4 Turn off the power of your TV and then turn on the power again. 5 Set the input source selector of your TV to this unit (HDMI, etc.). 6 Select the connected component as the input source by pressing INPUT on the front panel of this unit (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Confirm that the video image played back on the DVD recorder (etc.) appears in your TV correctly. 7 Use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. BASIC OPERATION 1 Notes • Check the following if you cannot operate this unit in synchronization with your TV. – Whether HDMI CONTROL is set to ON (see page 82). – Whether the HDMI control feature is activated for your TV (see the owner’s manual supplied with your TV). • While you are playing back audio from a non-HDMI component, turning off the power of your TV with the remote control supplied with your TV does not turn off the power of this unit. Playback continues without being affected. English 71 En MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment. y • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 43). • Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 35). Use SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments. • BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu. • Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU, and DISPLAY MENU. SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. Item Features Page TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound. 78 SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings. 78 MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level. 78 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay. 79 ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room. 79 DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 79 TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer. 79 BEAM MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. Item Features Page SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings. 74 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 75 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels. 77 INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. Item Features Page INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 80 INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source. 80 INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source. 80 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 81 HDMI SET Adjusts the various HDMI settings. 81 XM ANTENNA LEVEL (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signal. 82 DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. Item Features Page F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings. 83 OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings. 83 UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement. 83 72 En MANUAL SETUP Using MANUAL SETUP 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 SPORTS 9 OFF 0 SUR. DECODE ENTER +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. RETURN CH ;MANUAL SETUP TV VOL . 1)SOUND MENU 2)BEAM MENU 3)INPUT MENU 4)DISPLAY MENU (U.S.A. and Canada models) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / ENTER. to select a sub menu and press TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU 5 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / / / each parameter. and ENTER to configure ADVANCED OPERATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 6 Press MENU to exit. The OSD disappears from your TV screen. MENU English 73 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM MENU ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER FLAT TO WALL Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU 2)BEAM MENU . A)SETTING PARAMETERS B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT C)IMAGE LOCATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in “Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 84). • Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit and the distance of the center of this unit from the left wall. Listening position from the left wall ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. When you make settings for each parameter, other related parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your listening environment. Listening position from the unit Room length Room width Note Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from the left wall: 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3 A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 . INSTALLED POSITION ;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return | -------[ 5.4m ]| 4.9m | Room width and length p p If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 75). A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 Listening position from the unit and the left wall --------| 2.7m [ 2.5m ] | p p INSTALLED POSITION (Installed position of this unit) Use to adjust the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (Corner installation) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 74 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP • Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit. Listening position from the unit ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings. We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode before adjusting these parameters (see page 54). Notes • When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), the factory default value is automatically set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see page 76). • Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 54 and 60), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be output from the front left and right channels. Room width Room length B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT . a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH c)FOCAL LENGTH d)TREBLE GAIN p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 ----- 5.4m --- Room width and length p p | [ 5.4m ] | | p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle) Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test tone is automatically output. ( ) (+) (+) ( ) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 p p Note When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), the parameters newly set for the width and length of your listening room are automatically set as the factory default value. Choices: L90° to R90° Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the right. a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE5 beam 1/5 Front L L65deg L90 R90 * p p 0(deg) p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION \ [ 2.5m ] \ Listening position from the unit p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return English 75 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length) A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the listening position at the same time. This menu sets the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective channel. The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance. FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length) Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel to achieve an expansive feeling for each channel. The focal points except for the center channel should be set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the distance, the larger the expansion. focal length focal point sweet spot Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel sound beams travel. • Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel sound beams travel. • Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound beams travel. • Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left channel sound beams travel. • Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right channel sound beams travel. b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;;6.0m Front R;;;;;;;6.0m Center;;;;;;;;2.5m Surround L;;;;9.1m Surround R;;;;9.1m p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return y We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO SETUP (see page 35). Adjust this parameter only when you changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 75). Front left channel Center channel Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft) Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the normal position. • Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound beams. • Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right sound beams. • Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m (–1.5 ft) • Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround left sound beams. • Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround right sound beams. y We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m (or 1.5 ft)) for the center channel. c)FOCAL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;+1.5m Front R;;;;;;+1.5m Center;;;;;;;-0.5m Surround L;;;+2.3m Surround R;;;+2.3m p p 76 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain) Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each channel. y If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams. ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right channels seems unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the center of your listening room. You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 54). Choices: ON, OFF Setting range: 0% to 95% Initial setting: 0% C)IMAGE LOCATION . OFF L C )ON R p LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0% RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0% p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB • Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front left channel. • Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front right channel. • Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the center channel. • Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround left channel. • Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround right channel. LEFT (Left) Adjusts audio signals toward the left. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. Without adjustment With the front left channel adjusted d)TREBLE GAIN + . Front L;;;;;;;;0dB -----Front R;;;;;;;;0dB -----Center;;;;;;;;;0dB -----Surround L;;;;;0dB -----Surround R;;;;;0dB ------ p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Without adjustment ADVANCED OPERATION RIGHT (Right) Adjusts audio signals toward the right. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. With the front right channel adjusted English 77 En 01EN_YSP-3000_UA.book Page 78 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:36 AM MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU 1)SOUND MENU p p . A)TONE CONTROL B)SUBWOOFER SET C)MUTE LEVEL D)AUDIO DELAY E)ROOM EQ F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range G)TruBass [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams. + TREBLE;;;;;0dB -----+ BASS;;;;;;;0dB ------ p p . A)TONE CONTROL- p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings) Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer settings. B)SUBWOOFER SET . BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT CROSS OVER;;;100Hz LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m p p 78 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return BASS OUT (Bass out) Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer or the front left and right channels. This setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front left and right channels. CROSS OVER (Crossover) When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all lowfrequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position. Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB DISTANCE (Distance) Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the volume level. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by 20 dB. C)MUTE LEVEL pMUTE p p SOUND MENU -20dB [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 msec D)AUDIO DELAY AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return ■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range MIN Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room when the unit is mounted on the wall. Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type), REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room. Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo) • Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal reflectivity. • Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly reflective surfaces such as concrete walls. ■ TruBass Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS TruBass technology improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Choices: OFF, ON G)TruBass pON OFF p ADVANCED OPERATION MOUNTING (Mounting type) Use to enhance medium to low range sounds. Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount) • Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your listening room. • Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in your listening room. Select to adjust the dynamic range compression. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX for feature films. p REFLECTING;;;NORMAL p E)ROOM EQ . MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF p STD pMAX ■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer) [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Note TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 61) or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. English 79 En MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT MODE (Input mode) INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU Use to designate the input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. For information on the types of audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting the input mode” on page 87. Choices: AUTO, LAST 3)INPUT MENU B)INPUT MODE . A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT MODE C)INPUT TRIM D)INPUT RENAME E)HDMI SET F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL pAUTO p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return “F) XM ANTENNA LEVEL” is for U.S.A. and Canada models only. ■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment) AUX1 AUX1 DVD DVD ) p p ) 80 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Use to adjust the input level of the input source. C)INPUT TRIM 1/2 . TV/STB DVD ANALOG;;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT ■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim) p Use to assign the HDMI IN jacks of this unit to other components if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. By assigning other components to the HDMI IN jacks of this unit, you can display the names of the connected components in the front panel display and OSD and operate the components with the input selector buttons of the same name. If you connect a component to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit and do not assign a name to it, the default component name for HDMI IN jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD when selected. • Select HDMI1 to assign a component to the HDMI AUX 1 IN jack of this unit. Choices: TV/STB, AUX1 • Select HDMI2 to assign a component to the HDMI DVD IN jack of this unit. Choices: DVD, AUX2 • Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that input source. If the type of input signals is different from the setting, no sounds will be produced. p Note HDMI . HDMI1;;;; ( HDMI2;;;; ( p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter LAST • Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB MANUAL SETUP • Select AUX1 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX1 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX2 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX3 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio signals input at the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DOCK ANALOG to adjust the level of audio signals input at the DOCK terminal of this unit (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only). Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB 2 Press / to select the desired character. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press to change the character in the following order or press to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. ENTER 3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input. 4 Press ENTER to exit. The new names are registered, and the display returns to the previous screen. ENTER ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD and the front panel display. Press an input selector button (e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change the name for and perform the following procedure. D)INPUT RENAME DVD -> p p DVD p p Use to change the HDMI audio/video output/input to match the connected component. Choices: SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio), VIDEO INFO (Video information), HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) E)HDMI SET ADVANCED OPERATION [ ]/[ ]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Character [ENTER]:Return ■ HDMI SET (HDMI settings) . a)SUPPORT AUDIO b)VIDEO INFO c)HDMI CONTROL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Press / to place the _ (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. The _ (underscore) flashes. p 1 ENTER English 81 En MANUAL SETUP SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio) Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Choices: YSP-3000, OTHER a)SUPPORT AUDIO pYSP-3000 OTHER c)HDMI CONTROL p p HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI controlcompatible TV via HDMI. You can turn on or off the power, select the input mode, and adjust the volume level of this unit using the remote control supplied with your HDMI control-compatible TV. For details, see “Using the HDMI control feature” on page 71. Choices: OFF, ON [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return OFF pON XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return p Notes • This setting is effective when HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see right). • When HDMI CONTROL is set to ON, this setting is ineffective. This unit follows the settings of the HDMI control-compatible TV. • The HDMI video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. VIDEO INFO (Video information) Use to display the video information of the current input signal. Choices: HDMI RES., HDMI ERROR b)VIDEO INFO • Select ON to enable the HDMI control. The signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode. • Select OFF to disable the HDMI control. The signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode. ■ XM ANTENNA LEVEL (XM antenna level) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use to display the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient the connected XM Mini-Tuner Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% . HDMI RES.;;;;1080P HDMI ERROR;;;---- F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Return XM ANTENNA LEVEL;;;;97% • Select HDMI RES. to display the resolution of the HDMI input/output signals. • Select HDMI ERROR to display the error message for HDMI sources or devices connected (see page 104 for details). [ENTER]:Return Note “NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 5 in the Reference Guide). 82 En MANUAL SETUP ■ OSD SET (OSD settings) DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU Use to adjust the display position and to set the display time of the OSD. B)OSD SET . OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0 4)DISPLAY MENU OSD DISPLAY TIME;;;ON p p . A)F.DISPLAY SET B)OSD SET C)UNIT SET p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ F.DISPLAY SET (Front panel display settings) Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the front panel display. A)F.DISPLAY SET . STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF AUTO DIMMER ;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF SCROLL;;;;;;;;;;;;CONT. p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: 0 OSD DISPLAY TIME (OSD display time) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Use to set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select ON to show the OSD screen constantly. • Select 10s to turn off the OSD screen 10 seconds after an operation. • Select 30s to turn off the OSD screen 30 seconds after an operation. STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. Choices: –2, –1, OFF y AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) If no operation is performed for a specified period of time, the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display in this case. Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS (Australia, Europe, Asia, and Korea models), FEET (U.S.A. and Canada models) ■ UNIT SET (Unit settings) C)UNIT SET p METERS p p FEET ADVANCED OPERATION SCROLL (Front panel display scroll) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Use to select the mode to display information in the front panel display when operating your iPod or XM Satellite Radio. Choices: CONT., ONCE • Select CONT. to continue to scroll the display. • Select ONCE to scroll the display to the end once, after which the first 15 characters appear and stay. The OSD display time setting is available for your iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). For details, see pages 4 and 10 in the Reference Guide. [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select METERS to enter distances in meters. • Select FEET to enter distances in feet. Note 83 En English If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may change. Adjusting the audio balance Adjusting the audio balance You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience. Using the test tone 3 You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from each channel to manually balance the channel levels. Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level of each channel is identical when heard from your listening position. Press / to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows: TEST FRONT L ENTER ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER TEST CENTER MENU TEST FRONT R TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN TEST SUR.R VOLUME CH TV VOL TEST SUR.L MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TEST SUBWOOFER TV MUTE CODE SET Note (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 “TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 78). Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV 4 Press / to adjust the channel volume. YSP 2 Press TEST. “TEST FRONT L” appears in the front panel display and a test tone is output from the front left channel. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB TEST TEST FRONT L 84 En Adjusting the audio balance 5 Press TEST when you have completed all your adjustments. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV TEST YSP 2 Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5channel stereo playback (see page 60), My Beam (see page 61), or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 55). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and 60). Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows. CH LEVEL or CH LEVEL y ENTER If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. Using the audio output being played back You can also manually adjust the channel levels while playing back an input source such as a DVD. ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME FRONT L +1.0dB CENTER -2.5dB FRONT R +1.0dB SUR.R +2.0dB SUR.L +2.0dB RETURN CH TV VOL MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST --dB TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) Note ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR “SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 78). English 85 En Adjusting the audio balance 3 Press / to adjust the channel volume. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB 4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit when you have completed your adjustment. Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5channel stereo playback (see page 60), or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 55). • Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 61). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and 60). y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. 86 En Selecting the input mode Selecting the input mode You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, AUX1, and AUX2. y We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases. AV 3 TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle between input modes. AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT INPUTMODE MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 3BEAM 9 DVD AUTO TV/STB AUTO DVD DTS TV/STB DTS TV/STB ANALOG SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU When DVD is selected as the input source TV/AV AUX1 AUTO AUX1 DTS AUX1 ANALOG YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) When AUX1 is selected as the input source 1 When TV or STB is selected as the input source AUX2 AUTO AUX2 DTS When AUX2 is selected as the input source Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Note TV/AV ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and AUX2. YSP Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source. DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 • AUTO Automatically selects audio input signals in the following priority order: 1) HDMI 2) Digital 3) Analog ADVANCED OPERATION 2 y Use this input mode in most cases. • DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS. • ANALOG Selects only analog signals. Even when both digital and analog signals are input simultaneously, only analog signals are selected. You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in INPUT MENU (see page 80). 87 En English y Adjusting the system parameters Adjusting the system parameters This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Note When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 93), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters. Using the system parameters 2 Follow the procedure below to enter the system parameters. Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display. STANDBY/ON INPUT MEMORY PROTECT INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON 3 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV ENHANCER ENTRY AUX1 STB TV AUX2 CAT/ A-E ENTER INPUT AUX3 TV/AV TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM DISPLAY PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MENU TV DOCK DVD YSP RETURN MEMORY (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON 88 En Release INPUT on the front panel. Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MEMORY PROTECT 4 You can protect the settings you saved in the system memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or unwantedly changed. Press / to switch between “PROTECT: ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”. ENTER 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV PROTECT: ON YSP 3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display and press ENTER. PROTECT: OFF • Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection feature. • Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection feature. MEMORY PROTECT 5 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ADVANCED OPERATION English 89 En Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MAX VOLUME 5 You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Press level. / to adjust the maximum volume ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN Control step: 1 “ TV/AV YSP 3 6 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is displayed in the front panel display. Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER Setting the TURN ON VOLUME You can set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. MAX VOLUME SET 4 Press ENTER. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER 90 En YSP Adjusting the system parameters 3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER Setting the DEMO MODE You can test the sound beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP TURN ON VOLUME 3 4 Press ENTER. Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER ENTER 5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level. DEMO MODE ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF Control step: 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. Press ENTER. ADVANCED OPERATION 6 4 ENTER STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. English 91 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON” and “DEMO: OFF”. ENTER Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV DEMO: YSP ON 3 DEMO: Press / so that “PANEL INPUT KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. OFF ENTER • Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode. • Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. PANEL INPUT KEY STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the sound beam. The sound beam being output shuttles between left and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling. 92 En 4 Press ENTER. ENTER Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON” and “P.INPUT: OFF”. ENTER Disabling the front panel keys You can disable the front panel keys except when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV P.INPUT: YSP ON 3 P.INPUT: Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. OFF ENTER • Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on the front panel. • Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 F.PANEL KEY Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON Press ENTER. ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 4 English 93 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL: ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”. ENTER Setting the FACTORY PRESET You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the parameters in SET MENU. Note After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO SETUP again to match your surround sound environment. F.PANEL: ON 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP F.PANEL: OFF 3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is displayed in the front panel display. • Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel keys. • Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON FACTORY PRESET The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 4 Press ENTER. ENTER 94 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “PRESET: RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”. ENTER PRESET: RESET PRESET:CANCEL • Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current settings. • Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting procedure. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ADVANCED OPERATION English 95 En Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area. Note Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, STB, and TV). For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons to enter the remote control code while holding down CODE SET. Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area MY SUR. 6 TV MUTE Transmission indicator AV While holding down, press SPORTS 9 CODE SET TV SPORTS DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 9 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 3 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) Refer to “Controlling other components” on page 97 to operate the external component using the remote control. If the external component functions correctly the remote control code setup is successful. If the external component does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm that the remote control code is correct. See “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual and start over from step 1. Note 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set a remote control code for. The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains lit. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE CODE SET 96 En While holding down, press DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. If the remote control is without batteries for more than two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes. When changing the batteries, be careful not to press any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will clear the contents of the memory. Remote control features Controlling other components ■ Operating your TV Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and press TV to select TV as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the TV operation mode. TV/AV TV YSP STANDBY/ON 4 TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY 5 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 5 TV INPUT1 Selects the input source of your TV. 6 TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of your TV. 7 TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV. 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH TV VOL 2 3 3 TV INPUT Switches the input source for your TV. 3BEAM MUSIC OFF 2 CH +/– Switches between the available TV channels. 4 TV POWER Turns on or off the power of your TV. POWER POWER AV 1 Numeric buttons Selects a TV channel for playback. 6 MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 7 ADVANCED OPERATION (U.S.A. and Canada models) English 97 En Remote control features ■ Operating your DVD player/recorder Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press DVD to select DVD as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD operation mode. TV/AV ■ Operating your STB (CATV/Satellite tuner) Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press STB to select STB as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the STB operation mode. DVD YSP TV/AV STB YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 4 DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AUX3 AV TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT DOCK MEMORY ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 MY BEAM MY SUR. TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 4 5 6 5BEAM ST+3BEAM MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 1 2 3 7 8 9 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 0 ENHANCER 1 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY MENU 5 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 ENTER 3BEAM MUSIC OFF TV/AV CAT/ A-E 3 AUX3 3BEAM STEREO OFF 2 AUX2 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM 5BEAM AUX1 DVD AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 TV TV STB 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH 6 TV VOL TV/AV YSP DISPLAY MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 TV MUTE CODE SET TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) 3 (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 Cursor buttons / / Use to select DVD menu items. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available STB channels. / , ENTER 3 Operation buttons for DVD players Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder. 5 MENU Displays the DVD menu. 6 RETURN Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit from the DVD menu. 98 En 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 3 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your STB. Remote control features ■ Operating your VCR Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press AUX1 to select VCR as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the AUX1 operation mode. y This operation is available when your VCR is connected to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. TV/AV AUX1 YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 4 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET ADVANCED OPERATION 3 (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available VCR channels. 3 Operation buttons for VCR Operate your VCR, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your VCR. English 99 En Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV with the tuning capability Using the TV macro The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a DVD, you would normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the DVD macro button. 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press Notes • Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before setting macros. • The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the tuning capability. • If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. • If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. CODE SET 2 DVD AUX1 AUX2 STB Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE MACRO While holding down, press CODE SET STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select the TV channel. Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 CH OFF 0 or 9 CAT/ A-E ENTER 4 YSP VOLUME RETURN CH 6 SPORTS 7 8 9 +10 MENU TV/AV DISPLAY 5 MOVIE 0 +10 ENTRY 4 MUSIC OFF SUR. DECODE ENHANCER 3BEAM Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV VOL TV INPUT MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting. (U.S.A. and Canada models) ENTER 100 En Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV without the tuning capability 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE DVD Press and hold one of the input selector buttons for approximately two seconds to select the input source you want to operate macros for. The TV input changes at the same time the input mode changes. DVD AUX2 While holding down, press While holding down, press 1 MACRO CODE SET Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to cancel the macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. DVD TV MUTE Press INPUT1. Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1 screen. INPUT1 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV INPUT AUX2 STB CODE SET 2 AUX1 While holding down, press Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE 4 AUX2 ■ Canceling the macros Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE 3 AUX1 STB STB CODE SET 2 AUX1 ■ Operating macros While holding down, press MACRO CODE SET 3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros. ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. ENTER English 101 En Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause Remedy See page The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 29 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and use it normally. — The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 19 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or the input selector buttons. 45 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 47 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 47 The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from the source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect the HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 20 SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set SUPPORT AUDIO to YSP-3000 in MANUAL SETUP 82 The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 47 No sound from the effect channels. You are playing back the source or program in the 2-channel stereo playback or My Beam mode. Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select a multi-channel playback mode and play back the source or program once more. 54 No sound from the center channel. The output level of the center channel is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center channel. 84 No sound from the surround channels. The output level of the surround channels is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround channels. 84 This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. No sound. The sound suddenly goes off. 102 En Troubleshooting Problem No sound from the subwoofer. Cause BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to FRONT. Remedy Select SWFR. See page 78 The source does not contain low bass signals. Distorted or too little bass sound. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. One of the night listening enhancers is currently selected. Turn off the night listening enhancers. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass. 79 The volume level of the subwoofer is too high. Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer. — The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played back. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO. 87 There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 47 Select SWFR for BASS OUT. 78 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for SUBWOOFER SET. 78 Too much bass sound. Surround sound effects are insubstantial. 78 67 Set CROSS OVER correctly. 78 On-screen display does not appear. The OSD video pin cable is not connected properly. Connect the cable properly. 22 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — No sound is heard from the TV connected via HDMI. The TV does not accept the multi-channel audio signals. Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2-channel audio signals at the source component such as a DVD player. — “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “YSP-3000”. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “OTHER”. 82 There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit farther away from such equipment. — This unit does not output effect sounds properly. The original source includes surround effects. Disable the surround effect settings of this unit. — My Beam auto-adjust function does not work. The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible. — Try manual-adjust function. 62 The sound reflectivity of the listening room is too much. Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO. 79 The remote control may be operated outside of the remote control operation range. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 30 The function does not work properly because of the condition of the connected components. Select My Beam and then try again. 61 103 En English CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Low-frequency sounds are distorted. Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 30 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 30 The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the external component you want to operate. 45 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 96 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — The cursor buttons do not work during SET MENU operation. The operation mode selector was unwantedly set to TV/AV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. — Cannot use the My Beam auto-adjust function. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 30 Cannot operate external components with the remote control of this unit. ■ HDMI Error message Cause Remedy See page Device Error The number of the connected HDMI components exceeds the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — ■ FM tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 29 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 49 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 49 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 50 104 En Glossary Glossary ■ Dolby Digital ■ DTS Digital Surround Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ EUPHONY Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction system implemented with state-of-the-art sound technologies developed under the basic concept of enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound optimized without depending on the number of input channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers) or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady center localization. It also can reproduce the surround sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-ofhead” localization so that the listener feels an expanded sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a movie for long time. ■ HDMI 105 En English HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS Neo:6 Glossary ■ LFE 0.1-channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ SRS TruBass SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver. SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer lowrange audio data when presented with higher-frequency harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the original low-range sound that the speaker system is incapable of producing. 106 En Index Index ■ Numerics ■ M 3 Beam ............................................................................ 55 5 Beam ............................................................................ 54 MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................72 MEMORY .......................................................................42 Movie program................................................................64 Music program ................................................................64 My Beam.........................................................................61 ■ A AC power supply cable ................................................... 29 Audio pin cable............................................................... 20 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 35 ■ B Battery............................................................................. 30 BEAM MENU ................................................................ 74 Beam mode ......................................................... 54, 60, 61 ■ C ■ N Night listening enhancer .................................................67 ■ O On-screen display (OSD) ................................................32 Optical cable ...................................................................20 OSD video pin cable .......................................................20 Cable clamp .................................................................... 20 Cardboard microphone stand .......................................... 37 CINEMA DSP ................................................................ 64 ■ P ■ D ■ R DEMO MODE................................................................ 91 Demonstration DVD ......................................................... 6 Digital audio pin cable.................................................... 20 DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 83 Dolby Digital .................................................................. 56 Dolby Pro Logic.............................................................. 56 Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 56 DTS................................................................................. 56 DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 56 Dynamic range................................................................ 79 Rear panel .........................................................................9 Remote control ................................................................10 Remote control code .......................................................96 Remote control sensor.....................................................30 ■ E EUPHONY ................................................................... 105 ■ F FACTORY PRESET ....................................................... 94 Fastener........................................................................... 18 Front panel ........................................................................ 7 Front panel display ........................................................... 8 ■ H HDMI.............................................................................. 20 HDMI cable .................................................................... 20 IntelliBeam ..................................................................... 35 IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 36 ■ S SET MENU.....................................................................32 Sleep timer ......................................................................68 Sound field program........................................................63 Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................55 Surround mode ................................................................56 Surround sound ...............................................................54 SOUND MENU ..............................................................78 Sports program ................................................................64 Stereo sound ....................................................................60 System parameter............................................................88 ■ T Test tone ..........................................................................84 TruBass............................................................................79 TV macro ......................................................................100 TV volume equal mode...................................................67 ■ V Volume ............................................................................47 Volume mode ..................................................................67 ■ L LFE 0.1-channel ........................................................... 106 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ I PCM ..............................................................................106 Power...............................................................................31 English 107 En Specifications Specifications AMP SECTION FM SECTION • Maximum Output Power (JEITA) ................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 21 20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2 • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia model] ............................. 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz SPEAKER SECTION • Driver Small dia. speakers ...................... 4 cm (1-9/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 21 Woofers .................... 10 cm (3-15/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2 Frequency response ............................................. 60 Hz to 20 kHz (-10 dB, stereo mode) CONNECTIONS • Input Jacks TV/STB, AUX 1 AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ........... 2 pairs (Analog) TV/STB, AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ........ 2 (Optical digital) DVD, AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ............2 (Coaxial digital) AUX 1, DVD HDMI IN ............................................................... 2 AUX 3 .......................................................................................... 1 • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ...... 1 (Subwoofer) VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................1 (OSD) HDMI OUT .................................................................................. 1 • System Connector Jack INTELLIBEAM MIC ..................................1 (Microphone input) HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard: • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. 108 En GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .................................. AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Korea model] ....................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] .................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ..........................................AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption .................................................................. 32 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.5 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 800 × 155 × 152 mm (31-1/2 x 6-3/32 x 5-31/32 in) • Weight .............................................................. 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. List of remote control codes TV ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216 AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284 AKAI 295, 296 ALBA 296 AOC 297 BELL & HOWELL 292 BESTAR 298 BLAUPUNKT 229, 222 BLUE SKY 298 BRANDT 223 BROC SONIC 297 BUSH 296 BYD:SIGN 201, 202 CLATRONIC 298 CRAIG 224 CROSLEX 225, 298 CURTIS MATHIS 297, 226 DAEWOO 297, 298, 224, 227, 228 DAYTRON 239 DUAL 298 DWIN 293, 281 EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232 FURGUSON 223, 265, 266 FIRST LINE 298 FISHER 295, 233 FRABA 298 FUJITSU 289 FUNAI 277, 278 GE 293, 297, 234, 235, 236 GOODMANS 296, 298, 223 GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249 HITACHI 297, 239, 242, 243, 285, 206 ICE 296 IRRADIO 296 ITT/NOKIA 244, 245 JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237 JVC 296, 246, 247, 286 KENDO 298 KTV 297, 239 LG/GOLDSTAR 297, 298, 239, 237 LOEWE 298, 248, 207 LXI 293, 297, 225, 226, 233, 298 MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298 MARANTZ 298, 210 MATSUI 295 MEDION 203, 204, 298 MEMOREX 297, 216 MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287 NAD 226, 255 NEC 297, 252, 282 NOKIA 244, 245 NOKIA OCEANIC 245 NORDMENDE 265, 266 ONWA 296 PANASONIC 234, 235, 236, 253, 288, 211 PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298 PHILIPS 298, 225, 205 PIONEER 226, 235, 254, 255, 268 PORTLAND 297, 256 PROSCAN 293, 221 PROSCAN 231, 241, 251 PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270 QUASAR 234, 235 RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297 RCA 293, 297, 234, 256, 257, 258, 221 RUNCO 220, 230, 271 SABA 223, 269, 265, 266 SAMPO 281, 297, 280 SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248, 262, 275 SANYO 295, 233, 279, 272, 273, 274, 212 SCHNEIDER 296 SCOTT 297 SHARP 292, 239, 232, 213, 208 SIEMENS 229 SIGNATURE 216 SIGNATURE 292 SONY 263, 214 SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298 SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219 TELEFUNKUN 269, 264, 265, 266 THOMSON 223, 266 TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215 VIDECH 297, 242 WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216 YAMAHA 299, 292, 242, 285, 287, 253, 206 YAMAJI 298 ZENITH 216, 261, 271 DVD PLAYER AIWA 648, 649 APEX DIGITAL 652, 653, 654 BYD:SIGN 678, 679 DAEWOO 655 DENON 623, 624, 682 FUNAI 625 HARMAN/KARDON 656, 657 HITACHI 626, 688, 689 JVC 627, 643, 692 KENWOOD 628 KLH 658 LG/GOLDSTAR 645, 663, 664 MARANTZ 699, 659 MITSUBISHI 629 ONKYO 632, 633, 634 PANASONIC 623, 635, 668, 672, 682, 683, 684 PHILIPS 699, 647, 659 PIONEER 636, 637, 638, 673, 674, 675, 685 686, 687 RCA 639 SAMSUNG 642 SHARP 643, 692 SONY 644, 676, 677 SYLVANIA 662 SYMPHONIC 662 THOMSON 646 TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667 YAMAHA 699, 622, 623, 647, 682 ZERITH 663, 664 VCR ADMIRAL 395 AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329 AKAI 322, 323, 324 AUDIO DYNAMIC 392, 394 BELL & HOWELL 393 BLAUPUNKT 325, 326 BROC SONIC 327 BUSH 322 CANON 325, 328 CGM 396, 332 CITIZEN 396 CRAIG 396, 363 CURTHIS MATHIS 397, 328, 333 DAEWOO 328, 334, 335 DBX 392, 394 DIMENSIA 333 DYNATECH 397 EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397 FISHER 393, 336 FUNAI 397 GE 328, 333, 387 GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341, 351, 363 GOODMANS 334, 337 GRUNDIG 332, 338 HITACHI 325, 333, 349, 342, 343 INSTANT REPLAY 325, 328 ITT/NOKIA 393 JC PENNY 392, 393, 394, 328, 333, 349, 396, 363 JVC 392, 394, 344, 345, 346, 347 KENDO 396 KENWOOD 392, 394, 396 LG/GOLDSTAR 396, 388 LOEWE 396, 337 LUXOR 395 LXI 393, 396, 397, 336, 349 MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328 MARANTZ 392, 394 MARTA 396 MATSUI 396 MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397 MINOLTA 333, 349 MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348, 359, 353, 352 MTC 363, 397 MULTITECH 397, 348, 354 NEC 392, 394, 344, 383 NOKIA 393, 395 NOKIA OCEANIC 395 OKANO 323 OLYMPIC 325, 328 ORION 327 PANASONIC 325, 328, 339, 355, 378, 384, 385, 386 PENTAX 333, 349 PHILCO 325, 328, 397 PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328, 337, 356, 357 PHONOLA 337 PILOT 396 PIONEER 325 QUASAR 325, 328 RCA/PROSCAN 325, 326, 328, 333, 335, 349, 358, 363, 397 REALISTIC 393, 397, 328, 336, 359, 362, 396, 363 SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363, 364, 365, 366 SANSUI 394 SANYO 393, 336, 367 SCHNEIDER 337 SCOTT 399, 335, 336, 348, 359, 354, 358, 352 SELECO 322 SHARP 395, 362, 382 SIEMENS 393 SIGNATURE 2000 395, 397 SONY 368, 379, 372, 373, 374, 375 SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328 SYMPHONIC 397 TANDBERG 334 TANDY 397 TASHIRO 396 TATUNG 392, 394 TEAC 392, 394, 397 TECHNICS 325, 328 TEKNIKA 396 TELEFUNKUN 376, 377 THOMAS 397 THORN 393, 396 TOSHIBA 335, 389 TOTEVISION 363, 396 UNITECH 363 UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376 VIDEOSONIC 363 W.WHOUSE 396 WARDS 395, 396, 336, 362, 397, 363 YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394 ZERITH 344, 361, 368, 371, 379, 396, 397 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 739, 752, 753, 755, 758, 759, 762 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 722, 786, 787, 788 HAMIN 723, 724, 725, 726, 727 HITACHI 722 JEROLD 722, 728, 729, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737 MAGNAVOX 738 MOTOROLA 748, 728 OAK 739, 742, 743 PANASONIC 744, 745, 746, 747, 783, 784 PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768 PIONEER 748, 785, 747 RADIO SHACK749 i RCA 744, 792, 793 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 752, 753, 754, 789 SONY 756, 757 TOCOM 755 UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773, 774, 775 VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776, 777, 778, 779, 782 SATELLITE TUNER ECHOSTAR 822 GE 837, 838, 839 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 823 HITACHI 824 HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846 JVC 822 MAGNAVOX 825 PANASONIC 826, 829 PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849 PRIMESTAR 827 PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842 RADIO SHACK 828 RCA 837, 838, 839, 842 SAMSUNG 852 SKY+ 853 SKY HD 853 SONY 832, 835 TOSHIBA 833, 836 UNIDEN 825 ZENITH 834 ii 00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:45 AM UA YSP-3000 YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WK75380-2 UA YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Reference Guide for iPodTM/XM Radio Overview This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this unit, refer to the owner’s manual. y The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Contents Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2 Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2 Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2 XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................................... 5 Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............................................................................................. 5 Activating XM™ Satellite Radio .............................................................................................................. 6 Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations .................................................................................................... 6 Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels .......................................................................................... 9 Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information.................................................................................. 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 11 USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ This unit has the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately). Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, and use the supplied remote control to operate your iPod. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • The photos and video clips stored on your iPod are not displayed on your TV monitor. Connection Controlling iPod™ Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit using a dedicated cable. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CAUTION TV DOCK DVD Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are complete. AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO STB OFF 0 TV SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU Rear panel of this unit 1 ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO 2 DOCK 3 TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST 4 5 6 TV VOL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER TV MUTE CODE SET 7 8 9 0 Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) A y When your iPod and external component using the AUX 3 input jack are connected to this unit at the same time, and when the DOCK indicator is lit in the front panel display, iPod output takes priority. (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Navigate through the iPod menu ( / / / ) and starts playback (ENTER). 2 Displays the OSD (on-screen menu) menu. 3 Selects AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model) as the input source. 4 Use to return to the previous iPod menu. 5 Sets the operation mode of this unit. 6 Use to return to the previous iPod menu. 7 Stops playback. 8 Pauses playback. 9 Searches forward/backward. 0 Starts playback. A Skips to the beginning of the current/previous/next track. y 8 and 9 toggle between play and pause operations in the Simple Remote mode. 2 En 01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 3 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM Using iPod™ y • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 11. • While your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, your iPod battery is automatically charged as long as this unit is turned on. ■ Controlling iPod in the Simple Remote mode ■ Controlling iPod in the Menu Browse mode You can perform some basic operations such as play, pause, stop, backward/forward search, and track skip using the remote control without the aid of the OSD. Such basic operations can be performed also on your iPod. You can perform the advanced operations using the remote control with the aid of the OSD (see the owner’s manual for information on the OSD). In the OSD, you can browse the song list stored on your iPod. Further, you can change or adjust the settings on your iPod as desired. Such advanced operations cannot be performed on your iPod. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. YSP TV/AV YSP 2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears and the DOCK indicator lights up. 2 Lights up Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears and the DOCK indicator lights up. Lights up iPod connected iPod connected y Use # and * on the remote control interchangeably to toggle between play and pause operations. Note Information on the current song appears only in the iPod screen but not in the front panel display of this unit. 3 Press DISPLAY, and display the menu browse mode. The OSD appears on your TV. iPod DISPLAY Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings Top > > > > > > > English 3 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Using iPod™ y 4 Press / and / to navigate through the iPod menu, and press ENTER to start playback of the selected song. ENTER and ENTER • Press RETURN or MENU to go back to the previous menu. • The information on the current song also appears in the front panel display. You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE. For details, see “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s manual (see page 83). • You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (see page 83). Notes ENTER Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat • The YAMAHA logo appears in the iPod screen in this mode. • Undisplayable characters are shown as underscores “_” in the front panel display and OSD. • You can change or adjust the “Settings” parameters only in the OSD. ■ An example of the information display during playback 7 1 iPod[Play] S R 1/9 2 3 4 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia 5 6 ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 8 9 Settings parameters: Shuffle Shuffle Use this function for random playback of songs or albums. When “Songs” or “Albums” is chosen, “S” appears in the top right corner while the songs or albums are being shuffled. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the choices. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this function. • Select “Songs” for random playback of songs. • Select “Albums” for random playback of albums. Repeat Repeat Use this function for repeated playback of a song or a sequence of songs. When “One” or “All” is chosen, “R” appears in the top right corner while a song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the choices. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this function. • Select “One” for repeated playback of a song. • Select “All” for repeated playback of a sequence of songs. 4 En 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 (playback), (pausing), and (search backward) 9 Remaining time (search forward), XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. AND CANADA MODELS ONLY) XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ About XM Satellite Radio XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. XM READY Legal Disclaimer Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. y This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. See “Surround modes and recommended sources” in the owner’s manual (see page 56). Note The XM Satellite Radio service is unavailable in Alaska and Hawaii. Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold separately by XM Satellite Radio) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For information on your XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, see the operating instructions provided with XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold separately) y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a southfacing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “XM ANTENNA LEVEL” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 82 in the owner’s manual) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level (%) in the OSD. For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the connected indoor antenna of the Home Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more. Note If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, Home Dock may not be connected properly to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL TV/STB XM IR IN English AUX1 Rear panel of this unit 5 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Activating XM™ Satellite Radio Once you have installed XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted XM Mini-Tuner, connected Home Dock to your XM READY home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight-character XM Radio ID: on XM Mini-Tuner, on XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see “All Channel Search mode” on page 7). Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”, or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-9672346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM READY home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM READY home audio system, you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at http://www.xmradio.ca/ or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME 1 3BEAM CH TV VOL Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 2 Press FM/XM repeatedly to select XM as the input source. In the front panel display, the XM indicator lights up and the XM Satellite Radio information (channel number/channel name, channel category, and artist name/song or program title) for the currently selected channel appears. FM/XM Lights up [001] Preview y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select XM as the input source. • When XM is selected as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously chosen channel. 6 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ Category Search mode 3 Search for a desired channel by using one of the four XM Satellite Radio search modes: • To select a channel from all channels, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by channel category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 8. • To select a channel by directly entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 8. 1 SEARCH y CAT SEARCH • You can preset the XM Satellite Radio channels (see page 9). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display and/or in the OSD (see page 10). ■ All Channel Search mode 1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change the XM channel category. Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. CAT/ A-E ENTER SEARCH 3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search for an XM channel within the selected channel category. ALL CH SEARCH ENTRY ENTER 2 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search for an XM channel within all channels. ENTRY y ENTER Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search. y • Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search. • To change the channel category, press CAT/A-E ( / ). • Select channel “0” to display your XM Radio ID number. English 7 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset the XM channels. For details, see “Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels” on page 9. 1 ■ Direct Number Access mode 1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select either “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. SEARCH SEARCH ALL CH SEARCH or PRESET SEARCH CAT SEARCH 2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). CAT/ A-E 3 ENTER Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). 2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the desired three-digit XM channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons 1, 2, and 3. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 The front panel display changes as follows: ENTRY <XM> --1 ENTER <XM> -12 y You can also use the numeric buttons to directly input the preset channel number. <XM> 123 Notes • To enter a one- or two-digit number, press the corresponding number button(s), and press ENTER to confirm the number. If you do not press ENTER, this unit automatically confirms the entered number after a few seconds. • If you press a button other than the numeric buttons and ENTER during this operation, the Direct Number Access mode is canceled. 8 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels 4 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 5 preset channel groups with 8 preset channel numbers each). You can then recall the preset channels easily by selecting the preset group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 8. Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset number while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset number appears in the front panel display. ENTRY ENTER 1 Search for an XM channel that you want to preset. See “Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations” on page 6 for details. Flashing [043] XMU Currently selected channel number C8 [043] XMU y The initial factory setting for all preset channels is “[001] Preview”. 2 Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for about 10 seconds. MEMORY Currently selected preset number 5 Press MEMORY or ENTER to assign the preset group and number to the selected XM channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY or Note ENTER Operate steps 3 to 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. 3 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset group while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset group appears in the front panel display. 8 : (:)[ 0 4 3 ] X M U C Colon Colon (:) CAT/ A-E ENTER Note When you overwrite an existing preset channel, the previously stored XM channel information is cleared and updated. Flashing English C [043] XMU Currently selected preset group 9 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (channel number/channel name, channel category, and artist name/song or program title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. Note If a status or error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” in “Troubleshooting” on page 11. y • You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE. When ONCE is selected, the front panel display scrolls characters to the end once, after which the first 15 characters appear and stay. See “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s manual (page 83). • Undisplayable characters are displayed as spaces. ■ Displaying the XM channel information in the OSD Press DISPLAY. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. ■ Displaying the XM channel information in the front panel display DISPLAY Press DISPLAY repeatedly to toggle between the following information displays. DISPLAY XM INFORMATION ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE:Speed of sound .(Coldplay/Spe) [ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL [ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY Channel number / Channel name Channel category y Artist name / Song or program title When the channel number / channel name is displayed: [043] XMU When the channel category is displayed: <CAT>ROCK When the artist name / song title is displayed: Coldplay / Spee 10 En • To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again. • You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (page 83). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio OSD information, press ENTER. To unhold, press ENTER again. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio OSD information screens for future reference. To view the previous OSD screens, press RETURN repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio OSD information screen is on hold. TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Refer to the following charts when the status messages appear during your iPod or XM Satellite Radio operations on this unit. If you experience a problem that is not listed below, or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error with no status message appearing in the front panel display and in the OSD, check the connection between your iPod and this unit. Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring the song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 2 Try resetting your iPod. — Unknown iPod Your iPod is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — iPod connected The connection between your iPod and this unit is completed. Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Set your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 2 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the files stored on your iPod. Check the playability of the files stored on your iPod. — Store other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Status message Cause Remedy See page XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or not working properly. Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections and adjust the orientation for the best reception level. 5 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the indoor antenna of Home Dock for the best reception level. 5 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds to decode audio or text data. Wait until the decoding process is finished. — OFF AIR The currently selected XM channel is not broadcasting signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CAT/A-E repeatedly. 7 / - - - <CAT> - - - No channel is available for the selected category. 11 En English CHECK ANTENNA 01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 12 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WK75460-2 Items used for connections and operations in this guide s Audio pin cable (x1) s OSD* video pin cable (x1) s Optical cable (x1) s Digital audio pin cable (x1) s IntelliBeam microphone (x1) s Cardboard microphone stand (x1) s Demonstration DVD (x1) YSP-3000 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Connecting external components to this unit Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual. Connection example 2 *OSD: On-Screen Display This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. 1 2 This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and TV. Connection example 1 Installing this unit TV TV DVD player Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Optical cable 1. Pull out the cap VIDEO INPUT Video connection Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/ Digital airwave tuner DVD player Decide where to install this unit. Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual. OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 R COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT 2. Check the direction Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable, and then check the direction to insert the cable. HDMI INPUT HDMI OUTPUT HDMI connection 1 2 AUX 1 1 2 (Sold separately) 3 (Sold separately) 2 DVD IN An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture OUT Front left channel 40˚ to 50˚ 1 Front left channel Center channel Center channel Front right channel Front right channel 2 AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO 3 4 DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD YSP-3000 COAXIAL Surround left channel Surround left channel Surround right channel Surround right channel HDMI To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB VIDEO Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. Audio connection OUT AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB Audio connection They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit. For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual. The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of cloth on the floor in step 2. 1 Place this unit in front of 2 Place this unit upside 3 Install this unit in the the rack. down and connect this unit to your TV and DVD player. rack. 4 Installation is completed. To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. Install this unit using a rack, etc. YSP-3000 COAXIAL Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. Connect cables in the following order. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. Supplied Connect cables in the following order. 1 Audio pin cable (Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit) Supplied 2 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 1 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 3 Optical cable (Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit) Sold separately 2 HDMI cable (Displays the DVD digital video on the TV) 3 HDMI cable (Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit) 4 Digital audio pin cable (Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit) y Hint y Hint Note • To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. • You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions supplied with the metal wall bracket. Note Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. 0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 C2007 WK75520 [En] 1 Note If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack. Printed in Malaysia If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. 7/26/07, 4:06 PM All rights reserved. Continued from the front 3 Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your listening environment 6 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. ENHANCER 1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. A-E DISPLAY ENTRY ENTER The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts. MENU 2 3 4 ENHANCER YSP ENTRY MENU Will begin in 20sec YSP DISPLAY 7 Press and hold AUTO SETUP for more than 2 seconds. Please leave the room TV/AV ENTER A-E Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound. For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Enjoying DVDs in surround sound PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM Cardboard microphone stand (supplied) VOL MODE AUTO SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 **-------[RETURN]:Cancel RETURN 1 Select the TV channel using the remote control supplied with your TV. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the following screen appears on the TV. SHOW RESULT This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. [ENTER]:Save set-up [RETURN]:Do not save set-up Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel IntelliBeam microphone Center height of this unit Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Upper bound position of the microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Cardboard microphone stand More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Listening position Lower bound position of the microphone Center line Cardboard microphone stand 8 Check the following points. About the IntelliBeam microphone • Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit? • Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit? • Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit? About the room environment • Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible? A-E 9 Prepare to leave the room. Subwoofer VOLUME STANDBY/ON POWER POWER TV AV CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT “YSP-3000” appears on your TV. If the OSD video pin cable is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the connection example, switch the video input to “1”. 3 y Hint • The result may differ depending on the environment. • If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once again, press RETURN. 1) Press DVD on the remote control of this unit. AUX1 AUX2 INPUT1 AUX3 TV MIN MAX MIN This unit switches to the DVD playback mode. This unit switches to the TV playback mode. INPUT1 DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 INPUT1 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH AUX3 TV 2 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MACRO MACRO MEMORY FM MEMORY 2) Play back the supplied demonstration DVD on the DVD player. 11 Press ENTER. TV TV STB VOL MODE ENHANCER ENTRY AUTO SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 4 Check the digital signal being output at this unit. MENU AUTO SETUP COMPLETE TV/AV ENTER A-E YSP Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. RETURN 12 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam microphone in a safe place. The settings are automatically saved in the system memory. Input channel indicators The input channel indicators (see page 8 in the Owner’s Manual) are lit in the front panel display, and they switch according to the channel composition of the corresponding input source. If the sound is output from your TV speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 46 in the Owner’s Manual. VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Press VOLUME +/- on the remote control to adjust the volume level of this unit. 6 Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select the desired beam mode. 3BEAM MAX MACRO INTELLIBEAM MIC 0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 RETURN 3 Press TV on the remote control of this unit. Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit. For further information on the beam modes, see page 54 in the Owner’s Manual. DVD YSP DISPLAY y Hint • When leaving the room, bring this guide with you. • Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. • To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press RETURN. 5 Select the appropriate video input on your TV. RETURN TV/AV ENTER If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page 40 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again. DISPLAY The power of this unit turns on. Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control (see page 30 in the Owner’s Manual). If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit. If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the hint on page 36 in the Owner’s Manual. A-E YSP DISPLAY IntelliBeam microphone 4 Turn on the power of your TV. TV/AV ENTER The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and then the menu screen disappears from the TV. The best setting may not be done if you are in the room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing ENTER in step 10. 3 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK 2 Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position. Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. Enjoying TV in surround sound 1 Select the DVD video input on your TV. MEASUREMENT COMPLETE IntelliBeam microphone (supplied) Enjoying surround sound AUTO SETUP START RETURN The menu screen appears on the TV. If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video pin cable (see the connection example on the front page). INTELLIBEAM MIC 4 TV/AV You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of it as shown below. 1 10 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure, and then leave the room within 10 seconds. 7/26/07, 4:06 PM To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions, sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 in the Owner’s Manual.